Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - Service Express RDX Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is

2008 RDX

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31STK610

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Acura RDX. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular vehicle.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33STKC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０７／０６／０１　１８：２９：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００１　

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Acura RDX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

Introduction

ii

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００３　

－

－－

－

－－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：１６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００４　

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

Your RDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

290321Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００５　

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(main controls)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minders, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink, and other convenience items)

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

.......Instruments and Controls . 59

...............Features . 159

.......................................................................Before Driving . 271

.........................................................................................Driving . 289

...............................................Maintenance . 325

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 369

..............................................Technical Information . 393

.......................Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 409

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 413

IND

EX

1

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：３０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００６　

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.Important information about the

proper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, andother convenience features.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-ties, and technical information.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Driving

Maintenance

Before Driving Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Warranty and Client Relations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

2

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００７　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Front Ceiling Light SwitchMoonroof Switch

1: On RDX model onlyOn RDX with Technology Package model only

3:2:

(P.142)HomeLink Buttons (P.247)

(P.149)


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

GAUGES

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONPARKING BRAKE PEDAL

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS


AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER WINDOWSWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

AUDIO SYSTEM

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

CEILING CONSOLE MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

(P.71)(P.61)

(P.9, 25)

(P.146)

(P.123)

(P.140)

(P.275)

(P.273)(P.148) (P.293)

(P.170)(P.144) (P.9, 32)

(P.160)

(P.123)

(P.140)

(P.189)

(P.155)

1

2

3

０７／０６／０１　１８：３０：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００８　

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 : On RDX model only3 :4 :

On RDX with Technology Package model only


4

MIRROR CONTROLS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFF SWITCH

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

PADDLE SHIFTERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

HEADLIGHTS/TURNSIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

UPPER DISPLAY

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

NAVIGATION SYSTEM /CENTER DISPLAY

HORN

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS/REAR WINDOWWIPER/WASHER

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

(P.114/115)

(P.230)

(P.313)

(P.144)

(P.252)

(P.119)

(P.297)

(P.112/113) (P.169)

(P.118)

(P.168)

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS (P.72)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS (P.234) (P.139)

(P.32)

(P.118/145)

(P.220)

(P.155)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

3

3, 4

3, 4

2

1

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work, and it tells you how toproperly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 16.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 19

..Seat Belt System Components . 19......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 32

.............................Airbag Service . 33...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 35

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 35

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 36

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 36

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 38

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 38

...Additional Safety Precautions . 39Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.........Protecting Small Children . 41.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43....................Installing a Child Seat . 44

...............................With LATCH . 45.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 50...........Protecting Larger Children . 52

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

35 55

360

14

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(5)

(7)

(10)

(3)(1)

(2)(8)

(6)

(2)

(9)

(11)

(4) (6)(8)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：２５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１３　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

25

29

30


AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

０７／０６／０１　１８：３１：５０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１５　

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed. You will see the appropriateindicator and the message for eachcondition.

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’message will come on.When the tailgate is not tightlyclosed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

When both tailgate and one or moredoors are not tightly closed, the‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

35 39

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１６　

Locking the doors and the tailgatereduces the chance of someonebeing thrown out of the vehicleduring a crash, and it helps preventpassengers from accidentallyopening a door or the tailgate andfalling out.

Locking the doors and the tailgatealso helps prevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door or thetailgate when you come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors and the tailgate.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See pages

and for how to set them.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

123

101 109

119


Adjust the Front Seats2.

12

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１７　

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See pages and for how toadjust the seat-backs.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See pages and for how toadjust the front seats.

131 132

131 132

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１８　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

133

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.


14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００１９　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack, thencheck that the belt rests across thecenter of your chest and over yourshoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

CONTINUED


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２０　

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

19


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２１　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Advice for Pregnant Women


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：４４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２２　

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.


18

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２３　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

27 28

77

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０７／０６／０１　１８：３２：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２４　

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

14

49

Lap/Shoulder Belt


20

０７／０６／０４　１８：１２：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２５　

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

30

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２６　

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.Pull each belt out fully, and look for

frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a limited warranty onseat belts. See your

booklet for details.

354

Acura WarrantyInformation

Seat Belt Maintenance


22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２７　

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(3)

(14)

(9)

(9)(10)

(1)

(6)

(4) (5)

(17)

(16)

(8)

(15)

(16)

(2)(13)

(12)

(5)

(11)

(4)

(6)

(11)(7)

(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(8) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(9) Front Impact Sensors(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(11) Side Impact Sensors (First)(12) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(13) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(14) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Side Curtain Airbags

(15) Rollover Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(17) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２８　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

25

29

30

29

19

27

21

28

30


24

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００２９　

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

31

32

32

31

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３０　

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.After inflating, the front airbags

immediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.


Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

26

０７／０６／０１　１８：３３：５３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３１　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED


Advanced AirbagsDual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３２　

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.The passenger’s advanced front

airbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis properly positioned on the floor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the front passenger’sseat and its sensors.

32

354


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３３　

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

CONTINUED


How Your Side Airbags Work Side Airbag Cutoff SystemD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３４　

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

31

In a Rollover

In a Side Impact

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork


30

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３５　

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

78

64

78

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３６　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected in the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Any object, such as a folded-downback seat, that is touching the rearof the seat-back.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean


32

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Canada

U.S.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３７　

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Airbag Service


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０７／０６／０１　１８：３４：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３８　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


34

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００３９　

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children aged 12 andunder.

40 5552 55

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４０　

－

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

32

52

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.


36

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４１　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４２　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

52

132

16

14

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren


38

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４３　

－

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.This can prevent

children from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, the beltcould press deep into the child andcause serious or fatal injuries.


Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

124

49 50

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfor a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Additional Safety Precautions


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：４９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４４　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.If placed

facing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Child Seat Type

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Infants

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40

０７／０６／０１　１８：３５：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４５　

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：０５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４６　

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

32

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.


42

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４７　

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the rear seatingpositions.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４８　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

44

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：２５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００４９　

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the rear seats tosecure a child seat in any seatingposition: one in each outer seatingposition, or one in the center.

The five lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH. The location of each lower anchor is

indicated by a small button above theanchor point.

When you install a child seat in therear center seating position, use thecenter LATCH as shown in theillustration. To install a child seat inthe outer seating position, use eitherLATCH. You can install up to twochild seat at a time with outerLATCH.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in either of the rear outer seats:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Using the Outer LATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

LOWER ANCHORSFOR OUTER LATCH

BUTTON LOWER ANCHORSFOR CENTER LATCH

OUTER LOWER ANCHORS

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５０　

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Remove the cargo area cover, andplace it on the cargo area floor(see page ).

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

5.

6.

4.

3.

158

133


46

Flexible typeRigid type TETHER STRAP

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５１　

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the rear center seatingposition, use the center loweranchors as shown above.

Follow step 1 through 8 as describedpreviously to secure the child seat.

When you install the child seat in therear center seating position, youcannot use the seat belt behind thedriver’s seat.

Remove the head restraint (see page). Make sure the removed head

restraint is secured in the cargo area.Reinstall the head restraint when thechild seat is removed.

7.

8.

134

CONTINUED

Using the Center LATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

CENTER LOWER ANCHORS

TETHER STRAP HOOK ANCHOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：５０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５２　

If you want to install two child seatsin the back seats, place each childseat in the outer seat, as shown inthe above illustration.

Do not attach two child seatconnectors to a single lower anchorat a time.

The LATCH system or the childseats might be damaged if you try toinstall three child seats in the rearseats.


48

０７／０６／０１　１８：３６：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５３　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

2.1.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５４　

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

4. 5.


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

50

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５５　

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

Remove the cargo area cover, andplace it on the cargo area floor(see page ).

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Remove the head restraint (seepage ). Make sure the removedhead restraint is secured in thecargo area. Reinstall the headrestraint when the child seat isremoved.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back.

When you install the child seat inthe rear center seating position,you cannot use the seat beltbehind the driver’s seat.

1.

4.

2.

3.

(Outer seating position)

(Rear center seating position)

158

49

134

49


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

TETHER STRAP HOOKTETHER STRAP ANCHOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５６　

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

52

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５７　

CONTINUED

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

3.

4.

5.

43


Using a Booster SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５８　

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

14 52

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


54

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００５９　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Additional Safety Precautions


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

０７／０６／０１　１８：３７：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６０　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６１　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Canadian modelsU.S. models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

DASHBOARD

SUN VISOR

SUN VISORS

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６２　

Canadian modelsU.S. modelsU.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

DOORJAMBS

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６３　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 71

.....................Turbo Boost Meter . 71..................................Fuel Gauge . 71

.............Multi-Information Display . 72.......................System Messages . 77

...................Customized Settings . 80Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 111Windshield Wipers and

.................................Washers . 112Rear Window Wiper and

...................................Washer . 113.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 114

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 117...............Rear Window Defogger . 118...............Hazard Warning Button . 118

........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 119.............................Keys and Locks . 119

......................Immobilizer System . 121..............................Ignition Switch . 122

....................................Door Locks . 123....................Power Door Locks . 123

............Childproof Door Locks . 124..........................................Tailgate . 125

.....................Remote Transmitter . 127...............................................Seats . 131

.......Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 131Front Passenger’s Seat

..........................Adjustments . 132........................Head Restraints . 133

........Active Head Restraints . 135

....................................Armrests . 136.Folding the Rear Seats Down . 136

..................................Seat Heaters . 139............................Power Windows . 140

.......................................Moonroof . 142...........................................Mirrors . 144

..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 144..................Reverse Mirror Tilt . 145

.........................Heated Mirrors . 145Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 146...............................Parking Brake . 148...............................Interior Lights . 149

............................Ceiling Lights . 149..............Individual Map Lights . 150

........................Courtesy Lights . 151......................Cargo Area Light . 151

.........Interior Convenience Items . 152..................................Glove Box . 153

..................Front Door Pockets . 153.....................Beverage Holders . 154

........Accessory Power Sockets . 155...................................Sun Visor . 155

............................Vanity Mirror . 156.............Console Compartment . 156

.....................Cargo Area Cover . 158

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６４　

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

Front Ceiling Light SwitchMoonroof SwitchHomeLink Buttons

1: On RDX model only2:3:

On RDX Technology Package model only(P.274)

(P.142)(P.149)

Control Locations

60


HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM


PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCH

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

AUDIO SYSTEM

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES

AUDIO SYSTEM CEILING CONSOLE MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON (P.144)(P.61)

(P.71)

(P.146)

(P.123)

(P.140)

(P.275)

(P.273) (P.148)(P.293)

(P.155)

(P.140)

(P.170)

(P.160)

(P.189)

(P.123)

2

1 3

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６５　

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (AMBER)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR (RED)

(P.66)

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.64)

(P.63, 381)

(P.63, 381)

(P.63)

(P.63, 382)

(P.67)(P.69, 307)LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR

(P.65, 385)

(P.67)

(P.67)

(P.31, 63)

(P.65, 383)

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR (P.31, 64)

(P.68)

SUPER HANDLING-ALLWHEEL DRIVE (SH-AWD)INDICATOR

(P.64, 305)

(P.19, 62)

(P.70)

(P.68)

(P.66)

(P.68)

０７／０６／０１　１８：３８：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６６　

The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

19

77

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

62

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６７　

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. If it comes onwhile driving, it means thetransmission fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page . You will also see a ‘‘CHECK

TRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, sidecurtain airbags, driver’s seat positionsensor, and the front passenger’sweight sensors. You will also see a‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged, and you will also seea ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘OIL PRESSURELOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

382

381

77

381

78

7831

A/T TemperatureIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) Indicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６８　

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. You will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With this indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock function. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

7831

78305

121

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator


64

CanadaU.S.

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００６９　

This indicator has two functions:The brake system indicator (amber)normally comes on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position. If the indicatoris still on or comes on again after theengine starts, there is a problem inthe brake system including theelectric vacuum pump. If thishappens, have your vehicle checkedby your dealer. For more information,see page .

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the brakesand tires.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. You will also see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

2.

1.

77

384

77

383

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator (Red)

Brake System Indicator (Amber)


Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：２７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７０　

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 2.5 US gal(9.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the reading reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the reading doesreach E.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).Take your vehicle to a dealer to haveit checked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal driving ability,but will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

78

312

78

Low Fuel Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator


66

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７１　

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

This indicator has three functions: This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page

).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

1.

2.

3.

312

78

312

234

234

115

116

348 350

VSA Activation Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Cruise Main Indicator

High Beam Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７２　

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe SH-AWD system. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.For more information, see page .

233

115

301

78


Security System Indicator Lights On Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Super Handling-AllWheel Drive (SH-AWD)Indicator

68

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：３９：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７３　

If this indicator blinks while driving,it indicates the differentialtemperature is too high.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator has two functions:If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,have the flat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service. For moreinformation, see page .

Check the tire pressure monitor onthe multi-information display anddetermine the cause (see page ).

You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP HIGH’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out. Ifthe indicator does not go out, takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked.

For more information, see page .

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

1.

78

301

77

308

391

CONTINUED

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWDindicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：０７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７４　

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS). You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.

2.

310

7279


System MessageIndicator

70

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７５　

When the turbo charger is activated,this meter shows the boost pressure.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

CONTINUED

Turbo Boost Meter

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

TURBO BOOST METER

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

TACHOMETER

SELECT/RESETKNOB

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７６　

▲▼

To change the display, press theSEL/RESET button or INFO ( /

) button on the steering wheelrepeatedly until the desiredinformation appears (see page ).

You can also change the display bypressing the Select/Reset knob inthe instrument panel.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display. When youturn the ignition switch from the ON(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message isshown on the display.

73

77

80

Multi-Information Display

72

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO BUTTONS

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：２７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７７　

▲ ▼


Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

U.S. model is shown.

: Press the INFO( / ) Button

: Press the SEL/RESET Button

IGNITION OFF

IGNITION ON

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：３３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７８　

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

When you reset Trip A, AVG.FUEL A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, AVG.FUEL B is reset.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

You can customize the Trip A andAVG. FUEL A reset condition in themulti-information display (see page

).

This shows the outside temperaturein Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or inCentigrade (Canadian models).

You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).

91

89

Odometer

Trip Meter

Outside Temperature Display


74

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００７９　

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

This shows the time passed traveledsince you last reset it. When you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

You can customize the ELAPSEDTIME reset condition on the multi-information display (see page ).

This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset the Trip A orTrip B.

When you reset Trip A, AVG.SPEED is also reset.

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

When the battery is disconnected, oryou refuel, RANGE is also reset.

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

This shows your current fuelmileage.

When you turn off the engine, INST.MPG or INST. L/100 km is alsoreset.

The average fuel mileage will bereset when you reset the trip meter,or if the vehicle’s battery goes deador is disconnected.

You can customize the Trip A andAVG. FUEL A reset condition on themulti-information display (see page

).

327

91

93

RANGE

ELAPSED TIME

AVG. FUEL A/B

AVG. SPEEDMaintenance Minder

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST.L/100km (Canadian models)


Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０７／０６／０１　１８：４０：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８０　

This monitor shows how muchtorque is being delivered to eachwheel. For more information, seepage .

You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tirepressure are low, inflate them to thecorrect pressure. For moreinformation, see page .

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should risefrom the ‘‘C (Cold)’’ mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the reading may rise to nearthe ‘‘H (Hot)’’ mark of the gauge. Ifit reaches the ‘‘H’’ mark, pull safelyto the side of the road. See page

for instructions and precautionson checking the engine’s coolantsystem.

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s BluetoothHandsFreeLink (HFL) systemwithout touching your cell phone.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls, orvisit the handsfreelink.com website.

301

308 379257

SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Tire Pressure Monitor

Temperature Gauge Bluetooth HandsFreeLink


76

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８１　

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

Here is a list of messages shown onthe multi-information display:

See page19

See page11

See page65

See page383

See pages383, 384

See page310

See page309

See page381

See page381

See page382

CONTINUED

System Messages


Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

U.S. Canada

CanadaU.S.

CanadaU.S.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：１６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８２　

See page293

See page302

See page302

See page31

See page305

See page312

See page31

See page116

See page66

See page11

See page274

See page342

See page327

See page122


78

U.S. Canada

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８３　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼▲ ▼

▲ ▼

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message comes on for thefirst time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To cancel the message(s) before 5seconds elapsed, press the INFO( / ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / )button, some messages stay on orcome on again at regular intervalsuntil the problem is corrected.

You can see the message(s) again bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly if the system messageindicator remains lit on theinstrument panel.

FASTEN SEAT BELTFASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELTRELEASE PARKING BRAKEDoor and Tailgate Open


Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

Press the INFO ( / ) button

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８４　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

With the multi-information displayand the INFO ( / ) and SEL/RESET buttons on the right side ofthe steering wheel, you cancustomize some vehicle controlsettings.

To enter the customizing mode,press and hold the INFO ( / )button for more than 3 seconds.

To change the settings, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position, and the vehicle must bestopped with the transmission inPark.

You cannot customize the settingsunder these conditions:

If you turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

If you move the shift lever out ofPark.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon page .

Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

The first customizing menu is:

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button (see page ).

DEFAULT ALLCHG SETTING

83

84

Customized Settings


80

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８５　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～－～± ～

＊

CONTINUED

Customize SetupDescriptionCustomize MenuCustomize Entry Customize Group PageENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0°F 5°F3°C 0°C 3°C

ONOFFIGN RESETTRIP A RESETTRIP B RESET15 sec30 sec60 sec0 sec15 sec30 sec60 secSHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPEEDOFF

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature readingabove or below its current reading.Causes trip meter A and the average fueleconomy to reset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes how long (in seconds) the interiorlights stay on after you close the doors.

Changes how long (in seconds) the exteriorlights stay on after you close the driver’sdoor.

Changes when the system automaticallylocks the doors.

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUELRESET with REFUELELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER

AUTO DOOR LOCK

CHG SETTING(P.84)

METER SETUP(P.86)

LIGHTING SETUP(P.95)

DOOR SETUP(P.100)

87

89

91

93

96

98

101

: Default setting


Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０７／０６／０１　１８：４１：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８６　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Customize SetupCustomize MenuCustomize Entry Customize Group Description PageDRIVER DOORALL DOORSON

OFF

30 sec60 sec90 sec

DRIVER’S DOORWITH SHIFT TO PALL DOORS WITHSHIFT TO PDRIVER’S DOORWITH IGN OFFALL DOORS WITHIGN OFFOFFSETEXIT

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

CHG SETTING(P.84)

DEFAULT ALL

DOOR SETUP(P.100)

Changes which doors unlock with theremote transmitter in a first push.The exterior lights flash each time youpress the LOCK or UNLOCK button. Abeeper will also sound when you pressthe LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds)for the doors to relock and the securitysystem to set after you unlock but do notopen the door.Changes when the system automaticallyunlock the driver’s/all of the doors.

Returns all settings to the factory default.

103

105

107

109

83

: Default setting


82

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８７　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼

If you want to set the default settings,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

To enter the customizing mode,press and hold the INFO ( / )button for more than 3 seconds.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To set the default settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select SETthen press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

DEFAULT ALL


Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：０７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８８　

▲▼

▲ ▼

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUPLIGHTING SETUPDOOR SETUP

While CHG SETTING in theCUSTOMIZE ENTRY is shown inthe multi-information display, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to METER SETUP in theCUSTOMIZE GROUP.

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button, until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen goes backto CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. Repeat theprocedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select EXIT, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

Change Settings


84

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：１６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００８９　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

: Press and hold theINFO ( / ) button(3 seconds)

: Press the SEL/RESETbutton or the Select/Reset knob

: Press the INFO ( / )button or rotate theSelect/Reset knob

See page 86

See page 95

See page 100

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９０　

▲▼

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼

Here are the four custom settingsfor the meter setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETwith REFUELELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION

While METER SETUP is shown inthe CUSTOMIZE GROUP of themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button.


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

Meter Setup


86

: Press the SEL/RESET button orthe Select/Resetknob

See page 87

See page 89

See page 91

See page 93

: Press the INFO( / ) button orrotate the Select/Reset knob

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：３０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９１　

▲ ▼

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

While METER SETUP is shown inthe CUSTOMIZE GROUP of themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button. You will see theabove display.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Language Selection


Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９２　

▲ ▼

To exit LANGUAGE SELECTIONwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.All messages on the multi-

information display will be shown inthe language you selected.

When your choice is set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU. If thishappens, you need to repeat thesame procedure.


88

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９３　

▲▼▲ ▼

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above. Thehighlighted number is the currentsetting above or below the outsidetemperature. Press the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly until thenumber you want appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:

While METER SETUP is shown inthe CUSTOMIZE GROUP of themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

CONTINUED

Adjust Outside Temp. Display


Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

U.S.

Canada

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：４９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９４　

▲ ▼

To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.




90

U.S.

Canada

０７／０６／０１　１８：４２：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９５　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


To cause Trip A and AVG. FUEL Ato reset every time you refuel yourvehicle, follow these instructions:

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

CONTINUED

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel


Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９６　

▲ ▼

To exit TRIP A & AVG. FUELRESET with REFUEL withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.




92

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９７　

▲ ▼

－

－

▲ ▼

－


TRIP A The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip B is reset.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

There are three elapsed time resetchoices you can make:

IGN RESET The elapsed time isreset when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

CONTINUED

Elap. Time Reset Condition


Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：１６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９８　

▲ ▼



To exit ELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


94

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　００９９　

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼▲ ▼

There are two settings in the lightingsetup:

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP isshown on the multi-informationdisplay, select LIGHTING SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.



CONTINUED

Lighting Setup


Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

: Press the SEL/RESETbutton or the Select/Resetknob

: Press the INFO ( / )button or rotate theSelect/Reset knob

Seepage96

Seepage98

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１００　

▲ ▼

While LIGHTING SETUP is shownin the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button. You will see theabove display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select how long you want the lightsto stay on before they fade out (15,30, or 60 seconds) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors. You can change thetime that the interior lights fade out.

Interior Light Dimming Time


96

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：３５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０１　

▲ ▼

To exit INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME without changingthe current setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.



CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０２　

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼

The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights go off after the selectedtime when you close the driver’sdoor and take the remote with you.To change how long the lights stayon before they go off, follow theseinstructions:

While LIGHTING SETUP is shownin the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select how long you want the lightsto stay on before they go off (0, 15,30, or 60 seconds) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

Headlight Auto Off Timer


98

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０３　

▲ ▼

To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.




Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

０７／０６／０１　１８：４３：５３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０４　

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

There are five settings to choosefrom in the door setup:

AUTO DOOR LOCKDOOR LOCK MODE

SECURITY RELOCK TIMERAUTO DOOR UNLOCK

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP isshown in the multi-informationdisplay, select DOOR SETUP bypressing INFO ( / ) button, thenpress the SEL/RESET button.



KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT

Door Setup


100

: Press the SEL/RESET buttonor the Select/Reset knob

: Press the INFO( / ) button orrotate theSelect/Reset knob

See page 101

See page 103

See page 105

See page 107

See page 109

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０５　

－

－

▲ ▼

－

There are three settings you canchoose from:

OFFThe auto door lock is deactivated allthe time.

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.


While DOOR SETUP is shown in theCUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. You will see theabove display.

WITH VEH SPDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 9 mph (about15 km/h).

CONTINUED

Auto Door Lock


Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０６　

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.




102

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０７　

▲▼

▲ ▼

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select DRIVER DOOR or ALLDOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

While DOOR SETUP is shown in theCUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changesto CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe above display.

To select whether the driver’s doorunlocks or all the doors unlock whenyou unlock the doors with theremote transmitter or the key, followthese instructions.

CONTINUED

Door Lock Mode


Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：２３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０８　

▲ ▼

To exit DOOR LOCK MODEwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, and then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.




104

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１０９　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.


When you press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote transmitter tounlock the doors and the tailgate, theexterior lights blink twice to verifythat the doors and the tailgate areunlocked and the security system isturned off.

When you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.

127

CONTINUED


Keyless Lock AcknowledgementInstrum

entsand

Controls

105

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１０　

▲ ▼



To exit KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


106

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１１　

▲ ▼▲ ▼

If you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any of the doors orthe tailgate within 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the relock time you want (30,60, or 90 seconds) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.


CONTINUED

Security Relock Timer


Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：４９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１２　

▲ ▼

To exit SECURITY RELOCKTIMER without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.




108

０７／０６／０１　１８：４４：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１３　

▲ ▼

－

－

▲ ▼

－

There are three settings you canchoose from:


SHIFT TO P The driver’s door orall the doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to Park.

IGN OFF The driver’s door or allthe doors unlock when you turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.


OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.

CONTINUED

Auto Door Unlock


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１４　

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCKwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.




110

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：０９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１５　

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Refer to the navigation system manual.

On RDX model only1 :2 :3 :4 :

On RDX with Technology Package model only

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS


VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

PADDLE SHIFTERS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS/REAR WINDOWWIPER/WASHER

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS MULTI-INFORMATION

BUTTONS

(P.114/115)(P.297)

(P.112/113)

(P.118/145)

(P.139)

(P.234)

(P.72)(P.119)

(P.313)

(P.144)

(P.252)

UPPER DISPLAY(P.169)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM /CENTER DISPLAY(P.168)

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET(P.155)

(P.32)

(P.220)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P.118)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLBUTTONS (P.230)

3, 4

1

3

3, 4

2

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１６　

－

－

－－－

－

－

－

－

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wiper speed willincrease to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wiper MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

112

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１７　

－

－

－

－

The wiper is not activated.When you turn the wiper switch toOFF while the rear window wiper isin action, it will return to its parkedposition.

Rotate the switch clockwiseto turn the rear window wiper ON.The wiper operates intermittently.

When the wiper control leverposition is INT, the rear wiperoperates intermittently. When it isLO or HI, the rear wiper operatescontinuously. The rear window washer uses the

same fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wipers activated, the rearwindow wiper operates automatically.

ONOFFRear Window Washer with WiperRear Window Washer Only.

Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer. The rearwindow wiper makes one moresweep after you release the switch.

Rotate the switch counterclockwisefrom OFF to spray the windowwasher without activating the wiper.The washer will operate until yourelease the switch.

1.2.3.4.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer OFF

ON

Rear Window Washer with Wiper

Rear Window Washer Only

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１８　

－－Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderbeeper when you open the driver’sdoor.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

Turn Signal Headlights

Turn Signals and Headlights

114

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１１９　

－This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights, andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the door,the lights will turn off after 10minutes.

Push the leverforward and the high beam indicatorwill come on (see page ). Pull itback to return to low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when the headlightsare turned off.

67

CONTINUED

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams Fog Lights

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２０　

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights onreminder beeper.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

You can change the ‘‘HEADLIGHTAUTO OFF TIMER’’ setting on themulti-information display (see page

).98

Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

116

０７／０６／０１　１８：４５：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２１　

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled byturning the knob a click to the left.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

U.S. model is shown

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２２　

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. Pushing this button alsoturns the mirror heaters on and off.The indicator in the button comes onto show the defogger is on.

If you do not turn it off, the defoggerwill automatically shut itself off aftera certain period depending on theambient temperature. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn it on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

In cold weather, the defogger willnot automatically shut itself off. Youmust manually shut off the rearwindow defogger when it is nolonger needed.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all outside turn signals andboth indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Rear Window Defogger Hazard Warning Button

Rear Window Defogger, Hazard Warning Button

118

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２３　

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxand console compartment lockedwhen you leave your vehicle and thevalet key at a parking facility.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.Move the steering wheel up or

down, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Steering Wheel Adjustment Keys

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

LEVER

VALET KEY(Light Gray)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２４　

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

The master key can be retracted intothe remote transmitter. To use thekey, push the release button torelease the key from the transmitter.The key should be fully extended.To retract the key, push the releasebutton and at the same time push thekey into the remote transmitter untilit is securely latched.

Always use the fully-extended keywhen you insert it to the ignitionswitch. If the key does not fullyextend, the immobilizer system maynot operate properly and preventsfrom starting the engine.

The key may come in contact withyour finger while being retracted orextended. Make sure your fingers donot touch the pivot of the key whenretracting or extending the key.

Retractable Master Key

Keys and Locks

120

RELEASE BUTTON

Push

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：２７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２５　

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again. If you have lost your key and cannot

start the engine, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２６　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

78

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

122

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２７　

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors and the tailgate.Push the top of the switch to lock alldoors and the tailgate; push thebottom to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. When you pullbackward on the lock tab on thedriver’s door, all the doors and thetailgate lock. Pushing forward on thelock tab on the driver’s door unlocksonly that door. The lock tab on theeach passenger’s door locks andunlocks only that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tabnext to the inside door handle.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door lock. Tounlock only the driver’s door, insertthe key, turn the key, and release it.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

You can change the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting on the multi-information display (see page ).103

CONTINUED

Door Locks

Power Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

123

To unlock

To lock

LOCK TAB

Passenger’s SideMASTER DOORLOCK SWITCH

Driver’s Side

Lock

Lock

Unlock

Unlock

０７／０６／０１　１８：４６：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２８　

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 9 mph (about 15 km/h) ormore, all the doors lockautomatically.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the switch down onthe open front passenger’s door willlock all doors and the tailgate.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pullbackward on the lock tab and closethe door. To lock the driver’s door,remove the key from the ignitionswitch and pull backward on the locktab. Then close the door.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

You can change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK ’’ setting in the multi-information display (see page ).

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

You can change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting in the multi-information display (see page ).109

101

Childproof Door Locks

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

124

LEVER

Lock

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：０１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１２９　

To open the tailgate, press and holdthe switch, then lift up.

To close the tailgate, hold thetailgate handle, lower the tailgate,then press down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

The tailgate will lock when you lockthe driver’s door, and will unlockwhen you unlock all doors.

You can change the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting on the multi-information display (see page ).

56

103

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

SWITCH

TAILGATEHANDLE

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：０７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３０　

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Use a small flat-tip screwdriver toremove the cover on the back of thetailgate.

Push and hold the release lever tothe right as shown, then push thetailgate to open it.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Unlocking the Tailgate

Tailgate

126

COVER LEVER

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３１　

－

－

－

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the ceiling lights (if the frontand rear ceiling light switches are inthe door activated position) willcome on. If you do not open any door,the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then fade out. If you relockthe doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the lights go offimmediately.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a beep to verify that thedoors and tailgate are locked and thesecurity system has set. This buttondoes not work if any door or tailgateis not fully closed.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,see page .

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twicewhen you push the button. If you donot open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock.

To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

To change the ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anybutton on the remote transmitter, orturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

105

103

107 96LOCK

UNLOCK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

UNLOCKBUTTON LOCK

BUTTON

PANICBUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３２　

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the keypad from thetransmitter by pushing any buttonfrom outside.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.Battery type: CR1616

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

1.

2.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter Care

128

SCREW

KEYPAD

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３３　

－




Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the keypad.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad,then install the parts in reverseorder.Place a cloth on the edge of the

keypad, and remove the upper halfby carefully prying on the edgewith a small flat-tip screwdriver.

4.

5.

3.

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

BATTERY

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：３９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３４　

Here are the settings activated withthe remote;

When you unlock the driver’s doorwith your remote, each remoteactivates the keyless memorysettings related to that remote. Thedriver’s ID (MEMORY 1 orMEMORY 2) is shown on the backof each remote.

To turn off this feature, press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons at the same time. The LEDin the remote will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons. Doing thiscancels the keyless memory settingsfor that remote.

Driving position memory(see page ).

To turn the keyless memory settingsback on, repeat this procedure. TheLED will blink once to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the driver’s seat (exceptthe power lumbar feature) andoutside mirrors start to move to thepositions stored in memory. Theindicator in the related memorybutton to the remote comes on.

146

Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter

130

TM

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３５　

－

Moves the seatforward andbackward.

Raises or lowersthe seat.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

Increases ordecreases thelumbar support.

Moves the frontof the seat up ordown.

Adjusts the seat-back angleforward orbackward.

Moves the wholeseat up andforward, or downand backward.The front of theseat also tilts upor down at thesame time.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

12 13Driver’s Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

０７／０６／０１　１８：４７：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３６　

－

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

12 13

Front Passenger’s SeatAdjustments

Seats

132

BAR LEVER

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３７　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

14

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

The front and rear head restraintsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonand push the restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

133

RELEASE BUTTON

Front

SEAT BACK

CUSHION

LEG

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３８　

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the removed headrestraints are securely stored.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

134

Rear CUSHION

SEAT BACK

LEGS

RELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１３９　

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Acura dealer.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

Only use genuine Acurareplacement head restraints.

Active Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４０　

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

Remove any items from the seatbefore folding down the seat-back.

Make sure there are no items on thefloor before folding down the seats.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest.

The rear seat-backs can be foldeddown to give more cargo room. Eachside folds down separately. So youcan still carry a passenger in the rearseat.

Folding the Rear Seats DownArmrests

Seats

136

Front Rear

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４１　

Move the front seats as farforward as possible. Make surethe front seat-backs are in theupright positions.

Store the center seat belt buckleinto the pocket in the rear seat-back.

Lower the head restraints to theirlowest positions.

Pull up the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

Push the armrest back in place.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Move the front seats backward tothe desired position. Make surethe front passenger’s seat islocked in place.

Lift the front edge of the rear seatcushion, then pull up on the rearof the seat cushion, then fold thecushion forward.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

137

RELEASE LEVERBUCKLE

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４２　

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

Make sure that the folded down rearseat does not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors and the front passenger’sseat belt reminder indicator to workimproperly (see pages and ).Also check the passenger airbag offindicator to assure proper operationof the passenger’s front airbag.

After returning the seat-back to theupright position, tug on the seat-backto make sure it is latched. If the seat-back is not latched fully, the seat beltwill not work properly and you willsee the red indicator behind therelease lever as shown.

To return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position, lift up the seatcushion, then place the rear of theseat cushion at the base of the seat-back. Use the seat buckles as guides.Lower the front of the seat cushionuntil it locks into place.

Make sure the seat-back and seatcushion are locked securely and allrear shoulder belts are positioned infront of the rear seat-backs.

283

20 32

Carrying Cargo

Seats

138

RELEASELEVER

INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：５０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４３　

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag cutoffsystem.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use seat heaters.Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139


Passenger’s Seat

Driver’s SeatHEATERS

０７／０６／０１　１８：４８：５８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４４　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want to stop thewindow. To close the window, pullback on the switch and hold it.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

Power Windows

140

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４５　

－－

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If either frontwindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

To open or close eitherfront window fully, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically go upor down all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close either front windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly to the firstdetent and hold it. The window willstop when you release the switch.

AUTO REVERSEAUTO

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

141

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４６　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

To tilt the moonroof, push the centerof the moonroof switch straight up.To stop the moonroof from tiltingfully open, push the moonroof switchforward.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull or push the moonroofswitch lightly to the first detent andhold it. The moonroof will stop whenyou release the switch.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe moonroof switch forward to thesecond detent, then release it. Themoonroof closes all the way. To stopthe moonroof from closing all theway, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

Moonroof

142

MOONROOF SWITCH

Tilt

Open

Close

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４７　

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４８　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this feature.

1.

2.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

144

SELECTOR SWITCH

INDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

SENSOR

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and af f ect itsperf ormance.

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１４９　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursetting.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

The passenger outside mirror has areverse tilt feature. When in reverse,the mirror will tilt down slightly toimprove your view as you parallelpark. Shifting out of reverse willreturn the mirror to its originalposition.

To turn the feature off, place theswitch in the center or left position.

To tilt the passenger mirror, placethe selector switch in the rightposition.

3.

4.

146

Heated Mirrors

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

145

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：３５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５０　

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Press and release the SET buttonon the control panel. You will heara beep. Immediately press andhold one of the memory buttons (1or 2) until you hear two beeps.The indicator in the memorybutton will come on. The currentpositions of the driver’s seat andoutside mirrors are now stored.

Seat, except for power lumbar, andoutside mirror positions, can bestored in separate memories. Youselect a memorized position bypushing the appropriate button orusing the appropriate remotetransmitter (Memory 1 orMemory 2).

3.

1.

2.131

144

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

146

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５１　

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park.Adjust the outside mirrors.

Make sure the vehicle is parked.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

Doing any of the following afterpressing the SET button will cancelthe storing procedure.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

Press any button on the controlpanel: SET, 1, or 2.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

1.

2.

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

０７／０６／０１　１８：４９：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５２　

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).77

65

Parking Brake

148

Push

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５３　

Each front and rear ceiling light hasa three-position switch.

Front ceiling lights:In the ‘‘ ’’ position, both frontand rear ceiling lights are on all thetime except when the rear ceilinglight switch is in the OFF position.

In the ‘‘ ’’ position, both frontand rear ceiling lights are off all thetime.

With the front ceiling lights switch inthis position, the rear ceiling lightdoes not work, and both front andrear ceiling lights do not come onwhen you open any door.

Rear ceiling light:You can use the rear ceiling lightindependently. In the OFF position,the light does not come on even ifthe front ceiling light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ position. In the ON position,the light stays on continuouslyexcept when the front ceiling lightswitch is in the ‘‘ ’’ position.

CONTINUED

Ceiling Lights

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

Front DOOR ACTIVATED

DOOR ACTIVATED

Rear

OFF

ON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５４　

Open any door.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Unlock the doors with the key,lock tab on the driver’s door,master door lock switch, orremote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight(s) dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

If you do not open any door afterunlocking the driver’s door orremoving the key from the ignitionswitch, the light(s) fade out in about30 seconds. If you leave any dooropen without the key in the ignitionswitch, the light(s) will go off after 3minutes.

You can use the front ceiling lightswhenever the lights are off.To turn a light on or off, push its lens.

In the door activated position, bothfront and rear ceiling lights come onwhen you:


.96

Individual Map Lights

Interior Lights

150

LENSES

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５５　

The courtesy lights in the ceilingconsole come on when the lightswitch is in the or the

position. You can adjust theirbrightness by turning the Select/Reset knob on the instrument panel.

The cargo area light has a twoposition switch. In the OFF (right)position, the light does not come on.In the ON (left) position, the lightcomes on when you open the tailgate.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you;

Unlock the driver’s door.Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Open any door.

The courtesy light in each front doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight fades out in about 30 seconds.


.96

Courtesy Lights Cargo Area Light

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

COURTESY LIGHTS

ON OFF

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５６　

Interior Convenience Items

152

GLOVE BOX

COAT HOOK

CENTERPOCKET

SUN VISOR/VANITYMIRROR

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS inREAR SEAT ARMREST

CENTER CONSOLE

FRONT DOORPOCKET

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKETS

CARGO AREA COVER

DOOR LININGPOCKETS

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：３３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５７　

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

The interior of each front door hasan extendable pocket for maps andother small, lightweight items. Forsafety, be sure both front doorpockets are closed while driving.

Glove Box Front Door Pockets


Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

Lock

FRONT DOOR POCKETAn open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５８　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To use the front beverage holder,push on the lid. It will swing open. Toclose the lid, push it down until itlatches.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Beverage Holders


154

Push

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１５９　

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Accessory Power Sockets Sun Visor


Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

COVER

Console Compartment

COVER

Front

０７／０６／０１　１８：５０：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６０　

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

Your vehicle has a multi-functionconsole compartment. It includes anarmrest, a coin holder, a pen holder,a card holder and a consolecompartment with two separatableshelves.

To open the console compartment,push the button and lift the lid.To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

You can lock or unlock the consolecompartment lid with the master key.

The light comes on when you pull upthe cover.

Vanity Mirror Console Compartment


156

VANITY MIRROR

MASTER KEY

LID

Push

BUTTON

Close

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６１　

You can use the inside of the lid for apen holder, a coin holder and a cardholder.

The console compartment has twoshelves to divide it into two levels.To store small items, you can use theupper half of the space by puttingthe shelves down until they latch.The front and rear shelves can beused separately.

When you store a large item like abriefcase, lift the shelves up tocreate a large space.

The console compartment lightcomes on when the parking lightsare on.

The items on each shelves shouldnot exceed 11 lbs (5 kg). Heavyitems may damage the shelves.

The maximum dimensions of theitem you can store in the consolecompartment are:Length: 16.9 in (430 mm)Height: 12.2 in (310 mm)Width: 5.5 in (140 mm)


Instruments

andC

ontrols

157

LID

CARD HOLDER

PEN HOLDER

COINHOLDER

SHELVES

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：０９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６２　

Your vehicle has a cargo area coverto conceal your luggage and protectthem from direct sunlight.

To remove it: Place the cargo area cover on thecargo area floor.

Make sure the cargo area cover issecurely placed so it will not movewhile you are driving.

Do not put any items on top of thecargo area cover. They can blockyour view and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

The cargo area cover may beremoved to give you more cargospace.

Lift and pull the rear edge of thecargo area cover slightly to unlockit from the hanger bars, thenremove it straight out.

Reverse this procedure to install thecargo area cover.

Open the tailgate. Remove thehook from the tab on the tailgate.Make sure you use both hands toprevent the cargo area cover fromfalling accidentally.

1.

2.

3.

Cargo Area Cover


158

CARGOAREACOVER

HANGER BAR

HOOK TAB

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６３　

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

The climate control system and theaudio system have a voice controlfeature. Refer to the navigationsystem manual for more information.

...............Climate Control System . 160..........Dual Temperature Control . 165

..............Climate Control Sensors . 167................................Audio System . 168

.Audio System (On RDX model) . 170.....To Play the AM/FM Radio . 170.....Operating the CD Changer . 173

..................XM Satellite Radio . 183.................Adjusting the Sound . 186

......................Setting the Clock . 188Audio System (On RDX with

Technology Package................................model) . 189

.............................Interface Dial .189......To Play the AM/FM Radio .190.....Operating the CD Changer . 196

...................XM Satellite Radio .211..................Adjusting the Sound .217

.......................Auxiliary Input Jack .220............................Radio Reception . 221

..................Protecting Your Discs . 223.....CD Changer Error Messages . 226

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 228................Remote Audio Controls . 230.................Radio Theft Protection . 232

............................Security System . 233

...............................Cruise Control . 234......................................AcuraLink . 237

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 247

........Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 252.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 270

On RDX with Technology Packagemodel

Features

Features

159

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：２５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６４　

Climate Control System

160

RDX model

OFF BUTTON


MODE INDICATOR

DUAL BUTTON FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

AUTO BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

RDX with Technology Package model

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

MODE INDICATOR

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６５　

▲▼

Proper use of the climate controlsystem can make the interior dryand comfortable, and keep thewindows clear for best visibility.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

You can adjust the temperatures ofthe driver’s side and the passenger’sside independently (see page ).

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Set the desired temperature bypushing the driver’s sidetemperature control buttons ( or

). The selected temperature willshow in the display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

Press the AUTO button. You willsee AUTO on the display. Theindicator in the button also comeson as a reminder.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver andpassenger. If the driver’s side of thevehicle is getting too much sun, thesystem will adjust to a lowertemperature.

When you push the passenger’s sidetemperature control buttons, theindicator in the DUAL button comeson and the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated by voicecontrol. See the navigation section inyour quick start guide for anoverview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

1.

2.

165165

CONTINUED



Voice Control System

Automatic Operation


Features

161

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６６　

▲ ▼

▲▼

When you set the temperature to itslowest limit ( ) or its highestlimit ( ), the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ). The indicator in theDUAL button comes on.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in the AUTO mode.All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

To adjust the desired temperature,push the temperature controlbuttons ( or ).

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or

). The fan speed isrepresented by vertical bars in thedisplay.

When you press the DUAL buttonagain (indicator turns off), bothsides adjust to the driver’s sidetemperature.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

165


Dual ButtonSemi-automatic Operation

Temperature Control

Fan Control Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

162

０７／０６／０１　１８：５１：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６７　

CONTINUED

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the windshielddefrost on and off.

When you push this button, air flowsfrom the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield, and the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Whenthe indicator in the button is on, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off. Pushing thisbutton also turns the mirror heaterson and off (see page ).118

Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button Rear Window DefoggerButton


Features

163

０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６８　

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.The mode indicator in the display

changes to the current mode eachtime you press the button.

When the climate control system isturned off, the temperature in thedisplay will also turn off.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

To Turn Everything OffMode Button


164

０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１６９　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these buttons when theindicator in the DUAL button is lit.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then press the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) on the driver’sside. To set the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s,press the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) on the passenger’sside. You can adjust the passenger’sside without pressing the DUALbutton first.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the front passenger.

CONTINUED

Temperature Control Buttons

Dual Temperature Control

Features

165

RDX model

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROLBUTTONS

PASSENGER’SSIDETEMPERATURECONTROLBUTTONS





PASSENGER’SSIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：２３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７０　

▲▼

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byadjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control buttons ( or

).

Dual Temperature Control

166

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７１　

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Climate Control Sensors

Features

167

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：３３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７２　

Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the audiosystems installed in your vehicle.

For RDX model, see pagesthru .

For RDX with TechnologyPackage model, see page thru

.

170 188

189220

Audio System

168

RDX model


０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７３　

Audio System

Features

169



０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７４　

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ‘‘ST’’will be shown on the center display ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob, or theAM or FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the PWR/VOL knob.

XM satellite radio information isavailable on page .183

On RDX model

Audio System

To Play the AM/FM Radio

170

STEREOINDICATOR

FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTONTUNE/FOLDER BAR

AM BUTTON

SCANINDICATOR

A.SELINDICATOR

A.SEL/RDM BUTTON

VOLUMELEVEL

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR


０７／０６／０１　１８：５２：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７５　

－

－

－－－

－

CONTINUED

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbars, and auto select.

Use the TUNE/FOLDERbar to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar to tune to a higher frequency,and the side of the bar to tuneto a lower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar, then release it.

If you press and hold the orside of the bar, the frequency

will begin to change rapidly. It willstop when you release it.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’on the center display. The systemwill scan for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station for about 10seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each side of the bars (16) can store one frequency on AMand two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each side ofthe preset bar.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick the preset number (1 6), forthe station you want to store.Press the left or right side of thebar, and hold it until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN Preset

Audio System

Features

171

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７６　

－

－

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset bars.

, press theA. SEL/RDM button. This restoresthe presets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

For information, see page .

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

To activate it, press the A. SEL/RDM button. ‘‘A. SEL’’ will flash onthe center display, and the systemwill go into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars (1 6).

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset bar.

221

186

To turn off auto select

Audio System

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Adjusting the Sound

AUTO SELECT

172

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７７　

CONTINUED

On RDX model

Audio System

Operating the CD ChangerF

eatures

173

Normal mode MP3/WMA mode

SCAN (D-SCAN) INDICATOR RPT (D-RPT)INDICATOR

WMA MODEINDICATOR

MP3 MODEINDICATOR

RDM (F-RDM)INDICATOR

RPT (F-RPT)INDICATOR

RDMINDICATOR

DISC NUMBER

DISC INDICATOR

TRACK NUMBER

FOLDER NUMBER

SCAN (F-SCAN)INDICATORVOLUME LEVEL


０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７８　

Audio System

174

LOAD BUTTON

DISC SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

DISC LOAD INDICATOR

CD/AUX BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON


DISP/MODE BUTTON

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

A.SEL/RDM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１７９　

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

For best results when using CD-R orCD-RW discs, use only high qualitydiscs labeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R or CD-RW, therecording must be closed in orderfor the disc to be played by the CDplayer.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).CD (CD-DA)

CD-R/RW177

CONTINUED

Audio System

Features

175

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８０　

To load a single disc:Press and release the LOADbutton on the changer unit. Youwill see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the centerdisplay, and the disc load indicatorturns red and starts blinking.

Insert a disc into the disc slotwhen the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on thecenter display at the same time.Insert the disc only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way. You will see the discindicator blinking on the centerdisplay.

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on thecenter display again, insert thenext CD in the slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, pressthe LOAD button again after thelast CD has loaded. ‘‘DISC READ’’appears on the center display, thenthe system begins playing the lastCD loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonon the changer unit until you heara beep. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ onthe center display, and disc loadindicator turns red and startsblinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on thecenter display at the same time.Insert it only halfway; the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the centerdisplay, and the disc load indicatorturns red again and blinks as theCD is loaded.


1.

2.

3.

1.

2.4.

Audio System

Loading CDs in the Changer

176

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８１　

－

CONTINUED

The CD changer can play CD-Rs andCD-RWs compressed in MP3 andWMA format. When playing a disc inMP3 or WMA, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or‘‘WMA’’ on the center display. A disccan support more than 99 folders,and each folder can hold up to 255playable files.

When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the center display onlyshows two digits.

If the disc has a complex structure, itwill take a while to read the discbefore the system begins to play it.

You will see ‘‘DISC READ’’ on thecenter display, then the systembegins to play the CD.

You can load a disc(s) in any mode(AM, FM, XM radio, or AUX) if youdo not select an empty position.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

You can load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the discindicator is not shown on the centerdisplay) by pressing the appropriateside of the preset bars. The currentCD stops playing and starts theloading sequence. The CD justloaded will play.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD/AUX button. You will see‘‘CD’’ on the center display. Thesystem will begin playing the lastselected CD in the CD changer. Youwill see the disc and track numbersdisplayed.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, the system will advance tothe next disc and begin to play. Toselect a different disc, press anappropriate side of the preset bar (1

6). If you select an empty positionin the CD changer, the system willtry to load the CD in the empty slot.

3.

Audio System

Playing an MP3/WMA DiscTo Play a CDF

eatures

177

０７／０６／０１　１８：５３：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８２　

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz(MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layers

Each time you press the DISP/MODE button while playing a CD(CD-DA), the center display changesfrom album name, to track name, toartist name, and then to normaldisplay. If the disc was not recordedwith CD-TEXT, ‘‘NO INFO’’ will beshown on the center display.

If the title is too long, it will not showall at once. Press and hold the DISP/MODE button, and the rest of thetitle will show on the center display.

You will also see the album and trackname (CD-TEXT), or the folder andfile name (MP3/WMA) under theseconditions:

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

Each time a new track, file, orfolder plays.

When playing a disc compressed inMP3/WMA format, the displaychanges from folder name, to filename, to artist tag, to album tag, totrack tag, and then to normal displayeach time you press the DISP/MODE button. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, ‘‘NOINFO’’ will be shown on the centerdisplay.

Name Display Function

Audio System

178

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：０５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８３　

－－

－

While a disc is playing you can usethe SEEK/SKIP bar to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theTUNE/FOLDER bar to selectfolders in the disc, and use theSEEK/SKIP bar to change files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3/WMA mode).Press and release the side ofthe bar to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track/file.

Toselect a different folder, press andrelease the side of the TUNE/FOLDER bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressand release the side of the barto move to the beginning of thecurrent folder. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

This feature, whenactivated, continuously replays thecurrent track (file in MP3/WMAmode). To activate it, press andrelease the RPT button. You will see‘‘RPT’’ on the center display. To turnoff this feature, press the RPTbutton for more than 2 seconds.

To move rapidly within a track/file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

In MP3/WMA mode

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SEEK/SKIPFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT

Audio System

Features

179

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８４　

－

－

－－

In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA modeThis feature,

when activated, replays all the fileson the current folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button twice. You will see‘‘F-RPT’’ on the center display. Pressand hold the RPT button for morethan 2 seconds to turn off thisfeature.

Press the RPTbutton twice to continuously replaythe current CD. In MP3/WMA mode,press the RPT button three times.You will see ‘‘D-RPT’’ on the centerdisplay. Press and hold the RPTbutton for more than 2 seconds toturn off this feature.

The scan function samplesall the tracks (files in a folder inMP3/WMA mode) of the currentdisc in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate this feature,press and release the SCAN button.You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ and the track/file number flashing on the centerdisplay. The system will then playthe track/file for approximately 10seconds. To hear the rest of thetrack/file, press and hold the SCANbutton for more than 2 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the following tracks/files for 10seconds each. When the systemfinishes scanning all the tracks/filesin the current disc, the systemreturns to the track/file it firststarted scanning with, scan iscanceled and the system begins toplay that track/file normally.

The folder scanfunction samples the first file of eachfolder of the current disc in theorder they are compressed in MP3/WMA. To activate this feature, pressthe SCAN button twice. The first fileof each folder plays for about 10seconds. You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ andthe folder number flashing on thecenter display. To hear the rest ofthe file in the folder currentlyscanning, press and hold the SCANbutton for more than 2 seconds.When the system finishes scanningall the folders of the current disc, thesystem returns to the folder itstarted scanning with, folder scan iscanceled and the system begins toplay that folder normally.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromrepeat to folder repeat, disc repeatthen to normal playing.

FOLDER REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

SCANFOLDER SCAN

Audio System

180

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８５　

－－

－

The disc scanfunction samples the first track (filein MP3/WMA mode) of each discwithin the changer in numericalorder. To activate this feature, pressthe SCAN button twice. In MP3/WMA mode, press the SCAN buttonthree times. The first track/file ofeach disc plays for about 10 seconds.You will see ‘‘D-SCAN’’ and discnumber flashing on the centerdisplay. To hear the rest of thetrack/file in the disc currentlyscanning, press and hold the SCANbutton for more than 2 seconds.When the system finishes scanningall the discs, disc scan is canceledand the system begins to play thefirst track/file of that disc normally.

Thisfeature plays the files within a folderin random order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3/WMA. To activate it, press theA. SEL/RDM button once. You willsee ‘‘F-RDM’’ on the center display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton for more than 2 seconds.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan to folder scan, disc scanthen to normal playing.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each folder inMP3/WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order. To activate it, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.In MP3/WMA mode, press theA. SEL/RDM button twice to selectwithin a disc random play. You willsee ‘‘RDM’’ on the center display.Press and hold the A. SEL/RDMbutton for more than 2 seconds toreturn to normal play.

Each time you press and release theA. SEL/RDM button, the modechanges from folder random torandom, then to normal playing.

In MP3/WMA modeDISC SCANFOLDER RANDOM

RANDOM (Random within aDisc)

Audio System

Features

181

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８６　

To pause a disc, press thecorresponding number of thecurrent disc on the appropriate sideof the preset bars. To play the discagain, press the preset bar again.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the CD will begin playing where itleft off.

Press and hold the eject button untilyou hear a beep to remove all thediscs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject the rest of the discs one at atime.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.


For information, see page .To remove a different CD from thechanger, select it with theappropriate side of the preset bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM, CD/AUX, or

button. To return to CDmode, press the CD/AUX button.The system will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press and release the eject( ) button. You will see‘‘EJECT’’ on the center display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notload another CD within 10 seconds,the system selects the previousmode (AM, FM1, FM2, or XMRadio).

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 10 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD/AUXbutton.

223

226

186

To Pause a Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc

Removing CDs from the Changer

Protecting Discs

CD Changer Error Messages

Adjusting the Sound

Audio System

182

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：３９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８７　

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionson the center display.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio, Inc.

CONTINUED

On RDX modelXM Satellite Radio

Audio System

Features

183

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY) BAR

CATEGORY NAME

XM BUTTON

CATEGORY MODEINDICATOR

CHANNEL MODEINDICATOR

CHANNEL NAME

PRESETNUMBER

XM BAND

DISP/MODE BUTTON

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

VOLUME LEVEL

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BARS

０７／０６／０４　１８：１２：４４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８８　

－

－

－

－

To listen to the XM satellite Radio,turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Push the PWR/VOL knob to turn onthe audio system, and press the

button. Adjust the volume byturning the PWR/VOL knob. Thelast channel you listened to will showon the center display.

Each time you press andrelease the DISP/MODE button, thecenter display changes in thefollowing sequence: Channel name,category, artist name, and music title.

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes. ‘‘CH(channel)’’ or ‘‘CAT (category)’’mode indicator appears on the centerdisplay.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of four methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), SCAN, and thepreset bars.

Press either side of the SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY) bar ( or )to select another category.

Press the TUNE/FOLDER bar to change channelselections. Press the side of thebar to tune to higher numberedchannels, and the side of thebar to tune to lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Operating the XM Radio DISP

MODE

To Select a Channel

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

TUNE

Audio System

184

０７／０６／０１　１８：５４：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１８９　

－－The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

To store a channel:

Pick a preset number for thechannel you want to store. Pressand hold the appropriate side ofthe preset bar until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the button again.The other XM band will be shown.Store the next six channels byrepeating steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbar to tune to it.



You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset bar. Each side of the barstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will be shown on thecenter display.

4.

3.

5.

2.

1.

186

228

SCAN

XM Satellite Radio Reception

Adjusting the Sound

Preset

Audio System

Features

185

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９０　

－

－＋

－

Use the TREBLE/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking. You can adjust eachmode in levels between 6 and 6.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side

strength, while FADER adjusts thefront-to-back strength. BALANCEcan be adjusted in levels between L9and R9. FADER can be adjusted inlevels between F9 and R9. WhenFADER adjustment level reaches F9,the subwoofer speaker will be turnedoff.

Each mode is shown on the centerdisplay as it changes. Turn thePWR/VOL knob to adjust the settingto your liking. When the levelreaches the center, you will see‘‘ ’’ on the center display. Thesystem will automatically return thedisplay to the selected audio modeabout 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Press the SOUND/CLOCK buttonrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,SUBWOOFER and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation)settings.

On RDX model

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Adjusting the Sound

Audio System

186

ADJUSTMENT MODE

SOUND/CLOCK BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL


PWR/VOL KNOB

０７／０６／０４　１８：１２：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９１　

－

－＋

－

－Use the

SUBWOOFER mode to adjust thestrength of the sound from thesubwoofer speaker. Turn the PWR/VOL knob to the desired level ( 6to 6). Even if the adjustment levelreaches 6, the subwoofer is notturned off.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe setting to your liking.

117

SUBWOOFER Audio System LightingSpeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Audio System

Features

187

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９２　

Change the hour by pressing the H(preset 4) side of the preset bar untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime. Change the minute by pressingthe M (preset 5) side of the bar untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime.

To set the time, press the SOUND/CLOCK button until you hear a beep,then release the button. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theSOUND/CLOCK button until youhear a beep, then pressing the R(preset 6) side of the preset bar setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

When you are finished, press theSOUND/CLOCK button again to setthe time.

On RDX modelSetting the Clock

Audio System

188

SOUND/CLOCK BUTTON

CLOCK

PRESET 5 (M)

PRESET 4 (H) PRESET 6 (R)


０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９３　

This dial consists of an upper part(selector) and a lower part (dial).Turning the dial left or right to selector scroll through a list or item(s) onthe navigation display and adjust thelevel or condition. Push the selectorto the left, right, up, and down toscroll through and select a list oritem(s). The selected item will behighlighted on the display. Toconfirm the item or enter the setting,push on the center of the selector(ENTER).

Your vehicle has the interface dial onthe dashboard to operate the audiosystem and navigation system. Mostfunctions of these systems can alsobe controlled with the appropriatebuttons on the dashboard, but somefunctions can be accessed orselected with the interface dial only.

When you operate the audio systemwith the interface dial, press theAUDIO button on the control panelto show the audio control display onthe navigation display. You can scrollthe display and enter the setting withthe interface dial. You will see theindicator , , ,or on the display. Thisindicates the direction to move theinterface dial.

You can operate the audio systemwith the control buttons on the CDchanger unit without displaying theaudio control display on thenavigation display. The audio settingwill be shown on the upper display.

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated by voice control.See the navigation section in yourquick start guide for an overview ofthis system, and the navigationsystem manual for complete details.


Audio System

Interface Dial

Voice Control System Features

189

ENTERSELECTOR

DIAL

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９４　

On RDX with Technology Package modelTo Play the AM/FM Radio

Audio System

190


RADIO BAND

SCAN INDICATOR STEREOINDICATOR

A.SEL INDICATOR

PRESET NUMBER UPPER DISPLAY

AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９５　

CONTINUED

Audio System

Features

191


SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

INTERFACE DIAL

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９６　

－

To tune with the interface dial, pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiocontrol display, then push theselector down, and turn the dial toTUNE. Then press ENTER on theselector, and turn the dial to thedesired frequency. To exit theTUNE mode, press ENTER again.

XM satellite radio information isavailable on page .

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, thepreset buttons or icons, and AUTOSELECT.

Use the TUNE/FOLDERbar to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar to tune to a higher frequency,and the side of the bar to tuneto a lower frequency.

If you press and hold the orside of the bar, the frequency

will begin to change rapidly. It willstop when you release it.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency the radiowas last tuned to are shown on theupper display. To change bands,press the AM/FM button. You canalso change bands with the interfacedial. Press the AUDIO button to viewthe audio control display and theband changes to FM1, FM2, or AMeach time you push the selector up.On the FM bands, ‘‘STEREO’’ will beshown on the audio control display.‘‘ST’’ will also appear on the upperdisplay if the station is broadcastingin stereo. Stereo reproduction on AMis not available.

211

Audio System

To Select a Station

TUNE

192

TUNE ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５５：５８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９７　

－－The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar, then release it.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’on the upper display.

To activate the scan function withthe interface dial, press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial, and push theselector to the right. You will see‘‘SCAN’’ on the audio control display.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again, orpush the interface selector to theright again.

To activate the seek function withthe interface dial, press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay, then push the selector onthe interface dial to the right or left.

CONTINUED

SEEK SCAN

Audio System

Features

193

SEEK ICONSSCAN INDICATOR

SCAN ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：０５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９８　

－

－

Each preset button/iconcan store one frequency on AM andtwo frequencies on FM. To view thepreset icons on the audio controldisplay, push the AUDIO button.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo sets of FM frequencies withthe preset buttons (on-screenicons).

To store the frequency on a preseticon, turn the interface dial toselect a desired preset icon. Theselected preset icon will behighlighted. Press and holdENTER on the selector for morethan 2 seconds to store thefrequency.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), youwant for that station. Press thepreset button, and hold it until youhear a beep.

1.

2.

3.4.

Audio System

Preset

194

PRESET ICONS

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０１９９　

－

To activate AUTO SELECT, pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiocontrol display. Push the interfaceselector down to scroll down thedisplay, turn the dial to A. SEL, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. You will see ‘‘AUTO SEL’’flashing in the audio control display,and ‘‘A. SEL’’ on the upper display.Then, the system goes into scanmode for several seconds.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

The system stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

To turn off auto select, pressENTER on the interface selectoragain. This restores the presets youoriginally set.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.


221

217

Audio System

AUTO SELECT

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Adjusting the Sound

Features

195

AUTO SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２００　

On RDX with Technology Package model

Audio System

Operating the CD Changer

196

Normal mode MP3/WMA mode

SCAN INDICATOR

FOLDER NUMBER

WMA MODE INDICATOR

MP3 MODE INDICATOR


DISC NUMBER

TRACK NUMBERSCAN INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０１　

CONTINUED

Audio System

Features

197

INTERFACE DIALAUDIO BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

DISC/AUX BUTTON DISC LOAD INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

DISC SLOT PWR/VOL KNOB


SEEK/SKIP BAR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：３５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０２　

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CD (CD-DA)CD-R/RWDVD-ADTS

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.

The changer cannot play DVD-V orDVD-R/RW formats.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).202

Audio System

198

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０３　

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

Press and hold the LOAD buttonon the changer unit until you heara beep. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ onthe upper display, and the discload indicator turns red and startsblinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in theupper display at the same time.Insert it only halfway; the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upperdisplay, and the disc load indicatorturns red again and blinks as theCD is loaded.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on theupper display again, insert thenext CD in the slot.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, pressthe LOAD button again after thelast CD has loaded. ‘‘DISC READ’’appears on the upper display, thenthe system begins playing the lastloaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

To load a single disc:Press and release the LOADbutton on the changer unit. Youwill see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upperdisplay, and the disc load indicatorturns red and starts blinking.

Insert a disc into the disc slotwhen the disc load indicator turnsgreen, and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears onthe upper display at the same time.Insert the disc only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way. You will see the discnumber blinking on the upperdisplay, and the disc load indicatorturns red again and blinks as theCD is loaded.


You will see ‘‘DISC READ’’ on theupper display, then the systembegins to play the CD.


1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

3.

2.

CONTINUED

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System

Features

199

０７／０６／０１　１８：５６：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０４　

You can load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiocontrol display. Select the emptyposition (‘‘No Disc’’ is shown on theaudio control display) by rotating theinterface dial. Then press ENTER onthe selector to enter your selection.The current CD stops playing andstarts the loading sequence. The CDjust loaded will play.

You can also select the emptyposition by pressing the appropriatepreset button.

You can load a disc(s) in any mode(AM, FM, XM radio, or AUX) if youdo not select an empty position.

You cannot select the empty positionif there is no disc in the changer.

Audio System

200

EMPTY POSITION

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０５　

－

When playing a CD (CD-DA), theaudio control display shows discnumber, album name, track number,and elapsed time. When playing aCD without this information, thenumber of the disc and track playingand the elapsed time are shown onthe audio control display.

If you want to see the list of the discsin the CD changer, press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay. You will see the current discposition highlighted.

Select the changer by pressing theDISC/AUX button. You will see the‘‘CD’’ on the upper display. Thesystem will begin playing the lastselected CD in the CD changer.

To select a disc, press an appropriatepreset button (1 6), or select anappropriate preset icon by rotatingthe interface dial, then press ENTERon the interface selector. If youselect an empty position (‘‘No Disc’’is shown) in the CD changer, thesystem will load a CD into the emptyslot (see page ).

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will advance to thebeginning of the first track/file (inMP3/WMA mode) in the next disc,then play that track/file.

199

To Play a Disc

Audio System

Features

201

CURRENT DISC EMPTY POSITION

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０６　

The CD changer can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs compressed in MP3and WMA format. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, you will see‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ on the upperdisplay. A disc can support morethan 99 folders, and each folder canhold up to 255 playable files.

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layers

If the disc has a complex structure, itwill take a while to read the discbefore the system begins to play it.

When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the upper display onlyshows two digits.

When playing a CD compressed inMP3/WMA format, the audiocontrol display shows disc number,folder name, file number, andelapsed time. When playing a CDwithout this information, the discnumber, track number, and theelapsed time are shown on the audiocontrol display.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz(MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

Audio System

202

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０７　

－While a disc is playing you can usethe SEEK/SKIP bar to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theTUNE/FOLDER bar to selectfolders in the disc, and use theSEEK/SKIP bar to change files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3/WMA mode).Press and release the side ofthe bar to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track/file.

You can also change tracks/files onthe audio control display. Press theAUDIO button to view the display,then push the selector on theinterface dial to the right to skipforward to the beginning of the nexttrack/file. Push the selector left toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track/file. Press it againto skip to the beginning of theprevious track/file.

To move rapidly within a track/file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SEEK/SKIP

Audio System

Features

203

SKIP ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：２５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０８　

－

To select a track, rotate the interfacedial or push up and down theselector on the interface dial. Thenpress ENTER on the selector toenter your selection.

You will see a list of the folder(s) inthe current disc. To select a folder(s), rotate the interface dial or pushup and down the selector on theinterface dial. Then press ENTER onthe selector to enter your selection.If the disc has several folders, thelist advances to the next folder.When the list of the files is displayed,select it by rotating the dial, orpushing the selector up and down.

Toselect a different folder, press andrelease the side of the TUNE/FOLDER bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressand release the side of the barto move to the beginning of thecurrent folder. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

You can also select a track/file (inMP3/WMA) directly from the tracklist on the audio control display.Press the AUDIO button to view thedisplay, then rotate the interface dialto the current disc. Press ENTER onthe selector to view the track list onthe display. The current disc ishighlighted.

In MP3/WMA mode

In MP3/WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION

Audio System

Using a Track List

204

CURRENT TRACKCURRENTFOLDER(S)

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２０９　

－－This feature, whenactivated, continuously replays thecurrent track (file in MP3/WMAmode). To activate it, press theAUDIO button to view the display,then push down the selector on theinterface dial. Rotate the interfacedial to select track repeat. PressENTER on the selector to enter yourselection.

You will see ‘‘REPEAT’’ next to theTRACK icon on the audio controldisplay. To turn off this feature,select track repeat as previouslydescribed, then press ENTER again.

This feature,when activated, continuously replaysthe current CD. Press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Rotate theinterface dial to select the discrepeat. Press ENTER on the selectorto enter your selection. You will see‘‘REPEAT’’ next to the DISC icon onthe audio control display. To turn offthis feature, select the disc repeat,then press ENTER again.

REPEAT DISC REPEAT

Audio System

Features

205

REPEAT INDICATOR

TRACK REPEAT ICON

REPEAT INDICATOR

DISC REPEAT ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１０　

－

－

You will see ‘‘FOLDER REPEAT’’ onthe audio control display. To turn offthis feature, select folder repeat,then press ENTER again.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat, press theAUDIO button to view the display,then push down the selector on theinterface dial. Rotate the interfacedial to select folder repeat. PressENTER on the selector to enter yourselection.

The scan function samplesall the tracks/files (in MP3/WMAmode) of the current disc/folder inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate this feature, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill also see ‘‘SCAN’’ and the track/file number blinking on the upperdisplay. To hear the rest of thetrack/file, press and hold the SCANbutton for more than 2 seconds. Ifyou don’t, the system advances tothe next tracks/files, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the track/file the sameway. When the system finishesscanning all the tracks/files in thecurrent disc, the system returns tothe track/file it first started scanningwith, scan is canceled, and thesystem begins to play that track/file

normally.

To activate scan feature on the audiocontrol display, press the AUDIObutton to view the display. Pushdown the selector on the interfacedial, then push the selector to theleft. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ next to theTRACK icon on the audio controldisplay. To turn off this feature, pushthe selector to the left again within10 seconds.

In MP3/WMA modeFOLDER REPEAT

SCAN

Audio System

206

SCAN INDICATOR

TRACK SCAN ICON

FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１１　

－－In MP3/WMA mode

The folder scanfunction samples the first file of eachfolder in the current disc in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate this feature, press theSCAN button twice. The first file ofeach folder plays for about 10seconds. You will see ‘‘FOLDERSCAN’’ next to disc number on theaudio control display. You will alsosee ‘‘SCAN’’ and the folder numberblinking on the upper display. Tohear the rest of the file in the foldercurrently scanning, press and holdthe SCAN button for more than 2seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next folder, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the folders the same way.When the system finishes scanningall the folders of the current disc, thesystem returns to the folder itstarted scanning with, folder scan iscanceled and the system begins toplay that folder normally.

The disc scanfunction samples the first track/file(in MP3/WMA mode) of each discwithin the changer in numericalorder. To activate this feature, pressthe SCAN button twice. In the MP3/WMA mode, press the SCAN buttonthree times. The first track/file ofeach disc plays for about 10 seconds.You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ next to theDISC icon on the audio controldisplay. You will also see ‘‘SCAN’’and the disc number blinking on theupper display. To hear the rest of thetrack/file in the disc currentlyscanning, press and hold the SCANbutton for more than 2 seconds.

CONTINUED

FOLDER SCANDISC SCAN

Audio System

Features

207

FOLDER SCAN INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５７：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１２　

－

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof it, and continues through the restof the discs the same way. When thesystem finishes scanning all thediscs, disc scan is canceled and thesystem begins to play the first track/file of that disc normally.

You will see ‘‘RANDOM’’ next to theTRACK/FILE icon on the audiodisplay. To turn off this feature,select random, then press ENTERagain.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan to folder scan, disc scanthen to normal playing.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each folder inMP3/WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display, thenpush down the selector on theinterface dial. Rotate the interfacedial to select random. Press ENTERon the selector to enter yourselection.

Audio System

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

208

SCAN INDICATOR RANDOM INDICATOR

TRACK RANDOM ICONDISC SCAN ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１３　

－In MP3/WMA mode

Thisfeature plays the files within a folderin random order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3/WMA. To activate folder randomplay, press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display, thenpush down the selector on theinterface dial. Rotate the interfacedial to select the folder random.Press ENTER on the selector toenter your selection.

You will see ‘‘FOLDER RANDOM’’on the audio control display. To turnoff this feature, select the folderrandom then, press ENTER again.

You can play a DVD-A disc in the CDchanger. The disc controls are sameas previously described.

To pause a disc, press the presetbutton which corresponds to thecurrent disc. To play the disc again,press the preset button again.

You can also pause a disc on theaudio control display. Press theAUDIO button to view the display,select the corresponding number ofthe current disc on the preset iconsby turning the interface knob, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. To play the disc again,select the preset icon, then pressENTER again.

FOLDER RANDOMPlaying a DVD-A Disc

To Pause a Disc

Audio System

Features

209

FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１４　

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the CD will begin playing where itleft off.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the DISC/AUX button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, select it with theappropriate preset button, or icon onthe audio control display. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

Press and hold the eject button untilyou hear a beep to remove all thediscs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject the rest of the discs one at atime.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.



To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM, or DISC/AUX, or

button to switch to the radio,or satellite radio, or auxiliary inputwhile a CD is playing. When youreturn to CD mode by pressing theDISC/AUX button, play will continueat the same point that it left off.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press and release the eject( ) button. You will see‘‘EJECT’’ on the upper display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system begins the load sequenceso you can load another disc in thatposition. If you do not load anotherdisc within 10 seconds, the systemselects the previous mode (AM, FM1,FM2, or XM Radio).

223

226

217

To Stop Playing a Disc Removing CDs from the Changer

Protecting Discs

Adjusting the Sound


Audio System

210

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１５　

CONTINUED

On RDX with Technology Package model onlyXM Satellite Radio

Audio System

Features

211

XM BAND

CATEGORY MODE INDICATOR

PRESETNUMBER

CHANNEL NUMBER


CH MODE INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１６　

Audio System

212

AUDIO BUTTON

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

DISP/MODE BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY) BAR

SCAN BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

XM BUTTON


０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１７　

－－

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionsin the upper display and the audiocontrol display.

To listen to the XM satellite Radio,turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Push the PWR/VOL knob to turn onthe audio system, and press the

button. To view the audiocontrol display, press the AUDIObutton. Adjust the volume turningthe PWR/VOL knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show onthe upper display.

Each time you press andrelease the DISP/MODE button, theupper display changes in thefollowing sequence: Channel name,category, artist name, and music title.

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.appears ‘‘CH’’ or ‘‘CAT’’ modeindicator appears on the upperdisplay.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio, Inc.

CONTINUED

Audio System

Operating the XM Radio

DISP MODE

Features

213

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１８　

－

－

You can also change channelselections on the audio controldisplay. Press the AUDIO button toview the display, then push down theselector on the interface dial. Rotatethe interface dial to select the tune.Press ENTER on the selector toenter your selection. Rotate theinterface knob to the desiredchannel. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press either side of the SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY) bar ( or )to select another category.

You can also change the category onthe audio control display. Press theAUDIO button to view the display,then push the selector on theinterface dial to the right side or leftside to select another category.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of four methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), SCAN, and thepreset icons.

You can also switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,on the audio control display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view thedisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Rotate theinterface dial to select the mode.Press ENTER on the selector toenter your selection.

Press the TUNE/FOLDER bar to change channelselections. Press the side of thebar to tune to higher numberedchannels, and the side of thebar to tune to lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Audio System

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

To Select a Channel

TUNE

214

TUNE ICON SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５８：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２１９　

－－The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the presetbuttons/icons. Each button/iconstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

To store a channel:

You can also scan the channels onthe audio control display. Press theAUDIO button to view the display,then push down the selector on theinterface dial. Push the selector tothe right to activate scan feature. In category mode, only channels

within that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the button. To viewthe audio control display, press theAUDIO button. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Audio System

SCAN PresetF

eatures

215

SCAN ICON

SCAN INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：０１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２０　

Pick a preset number for thechannel you want to store. Pressand hold the appropriate buttonuntil you hear a beep.

To store the channel on a preseticon, rotate the interface dial toselect a desired preset icon. Theselected preset icon will behighlighted. Press and holdENTER on the selector for morethan 2 seconds to store thechannel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the button again.The other XM band will be shown.Store the next six channels byrepeating steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button totune to it.



3.

4.

5.

217

228

Audio System

XM Satellite Radio Reception

Adjusting the Sound

216

PRESET ICONS

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２１　

CONTINUED

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, andFADER are each adjustable. You canalso adjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center andsubwoofer speakers. In addition, youcan set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) IIand Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

To adjust each mode, press theAUDIO button to view the audiocontrol display, push the interfaceselector down, and turn the interfacedial to SOUND. Then press ENTERon the selector.

Select the mode you want to adjustby pushing the interface selector upor down, or by turning the interfacedial.


Audio System

Adjusting the SoundF

eatures

217

SOUND ICON

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２２　

－

－＋

The current setting is also shown onthe upper display.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the audio control display.Turn the interface dial to the desiredlevel ( 6 to 6), and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER.

BASS/TREBLE

Audio System

218

CURRENT SETTING

CURRENT SETTING

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２３　

－－

－＋

－

－

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the audio controldisplay. Turn the interface dial to thedesired level (fader: F9 to R9,balance: L9 to R9), and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER. Toequalize the fader or balance, turnthe interface dial until the readingson the sound grid come to the centerof the adjustment bar.

Toadjust the strength of the soundfrom the center or subwooferspeaker, select it and press ENTERon the interface selector. Turn theinterface dial to the desired level (6 to 6), and enter your selection bypressing ENTER. The currentsetting is shown on the audio controldisplay. Even if the adjustment levelreaches 6, the sub woofer is notturned off.

Dolby PL(Prologic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from the audio signalrecorded with 2ch stereo sources.Dolby prologic II can only activatewhen listening to CD (CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, and AUX. When itactivates, ‘‘DPL II’’ is shown on theupper display.

To set this feature on or off, selectDolby PL II, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. Rotate theinterface dial to ON or OFF, andpress ENTER.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

CONTINUED

Audio System

FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER

Dolby PL (Prologic) II

Features

219

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２４　

－ The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes; OFF,LOW, MID, and HIGH. The defaultsetting is MID.

Turn the interface dial to the desiredsetting, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER. The auxiliary input jack is on the disc

changer unit. The system will acceptauxiliary input from standard audioaccessories.

Connect a compatible audio unit tothe jack, then select it by pressing:

CD/AUX button (RDX model)DISC/AUX button (RDX withTechnology Package model)

Audio System, Auxiliary Input Jack

Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Auxiliary Input Jack

220

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：３９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２５　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio Reception

Features

221

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２６　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources(such as garages or parkingstructures) can cause temporaryreception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

222

０７／０６／０１　１８：５９：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２７　

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,use only high quality CDs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R/CD-RW,the recording must be closed for itto be used by the system.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Protecting CDsGeneral Information

Protecting Your Discs

Features

223

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２８　

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.


Additional Information ofRecommended Discs

224

With PlasticRing

Bubbled/Wrinkled

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

Sealed

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２２９　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.


Features

225

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３０　

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

ErrorMessage

SolutionCause

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discchanger.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 224.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 224.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is playable disc in the CD changer(see page 198 ).Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 224.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Check Disc

Check Disc and ChangerError


226

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３１　

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

224

Mechanical error

Servo error

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, sign ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 224.)Insert the disc again. If the code does notdisappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,consult your dealer. Do not try to force the discout of the player.


Features

227

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL

PUSH EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：３９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３２　

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Satellite Radio Signals

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

228

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

Signal is weaker inthese areas.

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０６／０４　１８：１２：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３３　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM satellite radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the CD/XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

There may also be other geographicsituations or structures that couldaffect satellite radio reception.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM Canada at , or at1-877-438-9677. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number and

your credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

229

０７／０６／０１　１９：００：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３４　

＋

－

＋－

▲ ▼

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. They let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the steering wheel.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

To activate the seek function,press and hold the top ( ) orbottom ( ) of the CH button untilyou hear a beep. The systemsearches up or down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Satellite Radio, or CD (if a CD isloaded).

Remote Audio Controls

230

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：０１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３５　

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

＋－

If you are playing CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3/WMA mode)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track/file. Press it again toreturn to the previous track/file.

To select a different disc (folder inMP3/WMA mode), press and holdthe top ( ) or bottom ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep.

If you are listening to XM SatelliteRadio, use the CH button to changechannels. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset channel.Press the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous preset channel.

To select a different channel of thecategory you are listening to, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep.

Remote Audio Controls

Features

231

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３６　

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset bars or buttons(depending on models). Becausethere are hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ on the centeror upper display (depending onmodels) the next time you turn onthe system. Use the preset bars orbuttons (depending on models) toenter the five-digit code. The code islocated on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Radio Theft Protection

232

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３７　

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, driver’s locktab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, a beep will sound.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. Before you leave thevehicle, make sure the doors,tailgate, and hood are securelyclosed.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger inside the lockedvehicle turns the ignition switch on.

Security System

Features

233

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３８　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

234

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２３９　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle speeds up about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control on, you canstill use the accelerator pedal tospeed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

235

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４０　

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

The cruise control will be canceledwhen the vehicle speed reachesabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Tapping either of the paddle shiftersshifts the gear up or down, but thecruise control will be canceled if youdownshift to first gear.

For more information on drivingwith paddle shifters, see page .

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

297

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

236

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：４５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４１　

AcuraLink enhances your ownershipexperience by providing a directcommunication link between yourvehicle and the Acura Server.Working through the XM radiosatellite, AcuraLink works inconjunction with the navigationsystem, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink(HFL), and audio system in yourvehicle. It displays and receivesseveral kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information onyour vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safetyinformation.

Maintenance information to keepyour vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provideinformation about any problemswith your vehicle.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.

Most AcuraLink functions arecontrolled by the interface dial. Theinterface dial has two parts, a knoband a selector.

On U.S. RDX with Technology Packagemodel except Alaskan and Hawaiian

Interface Dial

AcuraLink

Features

237

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

０７／０６／０１　１９：０１：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４２　

Unread messages have a closedenvelope icon next to them. The icondisappears when it has already beenread.

Only diagnostic infomessages overlay the screen whiledriving. They indicate if your vehiclehas a problem that may needimmediate attention (see page ).

After purchasing your vehicle,messages may not appearimmediately.Your dealer has to register thevehicle identification before you canreceive messages. This can takeseveral days to process.

If you have new messages, anenvelope icon appears in the topright corner of the navigation screen.

Press ENTER on the interfaceselector, then select New Messagefrom the navigation system mapmenu. If there is more than onemessage, stored in the system,you will see a list of message titles.

To open a message: Scroll up or down, and select themessage you want to read bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Select Message to display theSelect a message category screen.Then, select ALL MESSAGES.

To view previously read messages,press the INFO button, then selectmessages.

244

Reading Messages

AcuraLink

238

NOTE:

ENVELOPE ICON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４３　

Diagnostic info and recall/campaign messages can only bedeleted by your dealer.

To delete a single message:Press the INFO button to bring upthe Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option,then select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll upor down to the message title youwant to delete, and select it bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Scroll to Delete with the interfaceknob, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

When you open a message, you canread a summary of it, and thenchoose one of several options. If anoption is not available for a message,that button will not be highlighted.

Scroll to the category with themessages you want to delete, andselect the category by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messagesoption, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll tothe AcuraLink/Messages button,and select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Select MORE by pushing theinterface selector to the right.

Press the SETUP button to viewthe setup screen.

The Delete All Messagescommand does not apply to Recall orDiagnostic Info messages. Thesemessages must be deleted by yourdealer.

To delete all messages:

CONTINUED

Deleting Messages Message Options

AcuraLink

Features

239

NOTE: NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４４　

－

－

－

－

－

－

To set your AcuraLink preferences(the types of messages you want toreceive, if any), visit the Owner Linkwebsite at www.owners.acura.com,and choose what you would like toreceive. If you do not have internetaccess, call Acura Client Services at(800) 382-2238; they can set yourmessage preferences for you.

Select this button todelete the current message.

Select this button to hear avoice read the entire message. Thisgives you more information than thescreen can display at one time. Whenyou select the Voice button, itchanges to a Stop Reading button.Select the button again to stop thevoice.

Select this button to call aphone number embedded in themessage. When you select , theBluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)dials the number for you.

Select this button to find the nearestAcura dealer using the navigationsystem.

Selectthis button to call the Acura dealeryou purchased your vehicle from.AcuraLink also directs you to thisdealer so you can schedule amaintenance appointment or receiveinformation about a message. If youvisit another dealer for service twotimes within a 14-month period,AcuraLink will reset to call thatdealer.

Select thisbutton to get more information aboutthe current diagnostic message. Touse this option, your cell phone mustbe linked to the HFL and have acompatible data service available.Access the Owner Link website tofind out which data services arecurrently compatible with AcuraLink.

To make a call, your Bluetoothcompatible phone must be paired toyour vehicle’s HandsFreeLinksystem, have its power on, and beinside the vehicle (see page ).252

Message PreferencesDelete

Voice

Call

Call

Find Nearest Acura Dealer

Call Your Acura Dealer

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink

240

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：２３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４５　

－

－

－

－ Selectthis button to begin the processrequired to connect to Acura. This isused to access the most recentdiagnostic information when aproblem occurs.

Select ON to havethe system automatically read eachmessage to you. Select OFF tomanually select the Voice buttonwhen you want a message read toyou.

To access the following functions,press the SETUP button, push theinterface selector to the right toselect MORE, then rotate theinterface knob to select AcuraLink/Messages.

Select ON if you want to be notifiedof new messages (envelope iconappears on the navigation screen).Select OFF if you do not want to benotified of new messages (envelopeicon does not appear on thenavigation screen).

Select thisbutton to delete all stored messageswithin a category, except fordiagnostic info and recall campaignmessages. These messages can onlybe deleted by a certified technicianafter the recall is done or theproblem is corrected, or through abroadcast message from Acura.

CONTINUED

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Phone-Data Connection

Auto Reading

New Message Notification

Delete Messages

AcuraLink

Features

241

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４６　

－There are six message categories inAcuraLink: Quick Tips, FeatureGuides, Maintenance Minders,Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,and Dealer Appointment Reminders.The system can store up to 256messages.

Message categories can be added,revised, or deleted throughbroadcast messages from Acura.

For the Phone DataConnection button to be active, youneed a Bluetooth compatible andenabled cellphone paired to theBluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).To complete the data connectionsetup, the paired phone must have acompatible data service.

The default setting is prompt. Whena diagnostic info message appears,and you select the Check Nowbutton, the system will prompt youbefore connecting to the Acuraserver. If you do not wish to connectat that time, select No at the prompt,and you will see the informationfrom the onboard database. The‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove theprompt when you select the CheckNow button and will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server. Thissetting only applies when you have aBluetooth enabled phone that ispaired with the HFL and you havecompleted the Phone-DataConnection setup.

Message CategoriesConnect to the Acura Server

AcuraLink

242

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４７　

These messages provide detailedinformation about the serviceneeded for your vehicle. When amaintenance message appears onthe multi-information display, a list ofneeded maintenance items isprovided through an AcuraLinkmessage. These messages tell youthe exact maintenance needed,helping you to avoid unnecessarymaintenance costs.

During the first 90 days ofownership, one of 16 differentmessages appears each day. Thesemessages help you to use andunderstand the technologicalfeatures of your vehicle.

These messages, based on updatedvehicle information and commentsfrom other RDX owners, supplementyour Owner’s Manual and QuickStart Guide. They provide you withrelevant information for a safe andenjoyable ownership experience. Foradditional information, call AcuraClient Services directly through theHFL.

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderFeature GuideQuick Tips

AcuraLink

Features

243

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：４５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４８　

If an instrument panel indicator stayson when it should go off, or amessage appears on the multi-information display, AcuraLink canidentify the problem, send theinformation to Acura for analysis,and then provide you with the mostaccurate repair information availableall before going to a dealer. Thishelps you handle the problem as itoccurs, preventing or limiting costlyrepairs.

The AcuraLink system cannotdetermine some mechanicalproblems (such as squeaks orrattles) that are not triggered by thediagnostic indicator monitors.

A diagnostic message is generated ifany of the instrument panelindicators stay on when they shouldgo off. For more information on theinstrument panel indicators, see page

.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

If your vehicle is affected by a recallor other important safetyinformation, a letter will be mailed toyou about the issue and how to fix it.If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,you will also receive a remindermessage through AcuraLink. Youcan then use the message options tocall your dealer for an appointmentor to find the nearest dealer.

61

Diagnostic InfoRecall/Campaigns

AcuraLink

244

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２４９　

You will see information from theonboard troubleshooting database.

You can then use message options tocall your dealer for an appointment,to find the nearest dealer, or to findout more information about the issue.

Depending on the severity of theproblem, the message will let youknow if you should see your dealerimmediately or if you can wait awhile.

When an instrument panel indicatorcomes on or a message is displayedon the MID, AcuraLink immediatelynotifies you with the message,‘‘Check more information.’’ If you donot want the information right away,select the Check Later option. If youwant the information now, select theCheck Now option. (If the navigationscreen is not active, you must selectOK from the navigation disclaimerscreen before you can check theinformation.) CONTINUED

AcuraLink

Features

245

０７／０６／０１　１９：０２：５８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５０　

When you select the Diagnostic Infooption, if the HFL is connected to acellular data service, AcuraLinkgathers more information about theproblem, and sends it to Acura.There, the information is analyzedand returned to the vehicle with themost accurate repair information.

When you make an appointmentthrough the Owner’s Link OnlineScheduling Service, you can bereminded about that appointmentthrough the AcuraLink system inadvance. If you need to reschedule,you can call your dealer directly withthe HFL.

The timing of your reminder isbased on your reminder preferenceestablished on Owner Link.




AcuraLink

Dealer Appointment Reminder

246

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５１　

×

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Safety Information

Important Safety PrecautionsF

eatures

247

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５２　

－ If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote transmitter 1 to 3inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 4.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.

Go to step 3.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 4.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 1 thru 3.

Test the HomeLink button bypushing it for about 1 second.

If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 5.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

248

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５３　

Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the learn button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener is needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton and watch the red indicatoron HomeLink.

If the indicator stays on, pressthe HomeLink button again; theremotely controlled deviceshould operate.If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

2.

1.3.

249

5.

6.

CONTINUED


Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

Features

249

LEARN BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５４　

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 2 thru 5 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

1.

2.

4.

5.

248


Retraining a ButtonErasing Codes

250

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５５　

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.homelink.com.




Client Assistance


Features

251

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５６　

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Here are the main components ofthe HFL system:

The HFL microphone is on theceiling console. The microphone isshared with the navigation system.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Phonebook

Microphone

Voice Control

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

252

０７／０６／０１　１９：０３：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５７　

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

HFL recognizes simple voice

and names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, and

store numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page 255 .

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capability

This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In

1888-9-ACURA-9.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL).HFL uses Bluetooth® technology to link your cell phone to your vehicle. With HFL, you can place and receive calls through your vehicle’s audio system, without the distraction of handling your cell phone. To use this feature, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone with the Hands-Free Profile. For more information, and a list of compatible cell phones,

www.acura.com/handsfreelink,

Here are the main features of the HFL. Instructions for using the HFL begin on page 253.

visit or call 1-888-528-7876. In Canada,

commands, such as phone numbers

visit www.acura.ca, or call1-888-9-ACURA-9. along with the Hands-Free Profile.

www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by

Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call

Here is the function of each HFLbutton:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob.

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

Below the HFL buttons is anotherset of voice control buttons for thenavigation, climate control, and audiosystems. To use the voice controlsystem, refer to the navigationsystem manual.


HFL ButtonsAudio System


Features

253

HFL BACKBUTTON

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５８　

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL in themulti-information display, you willsee this information in the display:

HFL Mode Message Indicateswhen you are dialing and receivingcalls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

You will also see a ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’ on the upper display.

:



254

SIGNALSTRENGTH

PHONE DIALINGROAMSTATUS

HFL MODEMESSAGE

BATTERYLEVELSTATUS

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２５９　

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL. Many commands can be spoken

together. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the center vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

CONTINUED

How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control

All phones may notoperate identically, and somemay cause inconsistentoperation of the HFL.


Features

255

NOTE:

０７／０６／０４　１８：１３：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６０　

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

1.

2.

3.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System


256

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６１　

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL system response is, ‘‘Wouldyou like the notification to be aring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFLsystem returns to its main menu.Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ringtone or prompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill be mute, and a message willbe displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ or ‘‘An incoming callprompt will be used.’’

your phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call atHandsFreeLink consumersupport at , or callyour retailer. In Canada, visit

, or call .

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

4.

5.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

(888) 528-7876www.

acura.ca (888) 9-ACURA-9

Pairing Your Phone


Features

257

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６２　

Your Bluetooth compatible phone

paired to the HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. To confirm that your phone is

with Hands-Free Profile must be

Bluetooth compatible, visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink or

HFL does not allow you to pair

Bluetooth compatible.

call 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit

Your phone retailer should also be able to confirm that your phone is

www.acura.ca, or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone. Make sure thephone you are trying to pair is inDiscovery mode.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Once the pairing process iscompleted, AcuraLink may display aconnection confirmation screen. Thisscreen is used to create a dataconnection between your cell phoneand the AcuraLink system. You canchoose to set up the data connectionnow, or do it later. If you want to doit now, exit the HFL menu bypressing the HFL Back button oneor more times.

4.

5.

6.

7.

3.

8.


258

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：４９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６３　

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

2.

3.

4.1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED


Features

259

０７／０６／０１　１９：０４：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６４　

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.1.

2.

1.


260

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６５　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch. Continuinga call without running the enginemay discharge and weaken thevehicle’s battery.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

3.

1.

2.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

CONTINUED

Making a Call


Features

261

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６６　

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

3.

1.

2.

4.


262

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６７　

＃

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

To send pound ( ) , say‘‘pound.’’ To send star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a name during a call, do this:To send a number during a call, do this:Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call


Features

263

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：２７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６８　

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from the HFLto the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

1.1.

2.

2.

To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

Receiving a Call Muting a CallTransferring a Call


264

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２６９　

To add a name, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Setting up the Phonebook


Features

265

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７０　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1.

2.

1.

3. To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:


266

０７／０６／０１　１９：０５：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７１　

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, clearthe passcode, and restore thedefaults in the system setup. Isthis what you would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, the passcode,and restore the defaults in thesystem setup. This may take up to2 minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed,otherwise say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

Clearing the System


Features

267

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７２　

＜＞

＜＞

To change from French to English, dothis:

To change from English to French, dothis:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Venillezattendre que le systeme change delangue. Please wait while thelanguage is changed.’’ ‘‘La languea ete changee. Retour au menu

principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avezsélectionné le Français. Les nomsen registrés dans une autre languene seront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?’’

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like tocontinue?’’, then the systemrepeats the response in English.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Changing Language(Canadian Models Only)


268

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７３　

＜＞

＜＞

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout English name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Please waitwhile the language is changed.Venillez attendre que le systemechange de langue.’’ ‘‘The languagehas been changed. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

4.3. As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.




Features

269

NOTE:

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７４　

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

When in reverse, the navigationbuttons are locked out, except theinterface dial on the dashboard. Turnthe dial clockwise to make thecamera image brighter, and counter-clockwise to darken the image.


Rearview Camera and Monitor

270

INTERFACE DIAL

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７５　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 272.................Fuel Recommendation . 272

.........Service Station Procedures . 273....................................Refueling . 273

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 274Opening and Closing

................................the Hood . 275...................................Oil Check . 276

.............Engine Coolant Check . 277...............................Fuel Economy . 278

...Accessories and Modifications . 281.............................Carrying Cargo . 283

Before Driving

Before

Driving

271

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７６　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. If thisoctane grade is unavailable, regularunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane of 87 or higher may be usedtemporarily. The use of regularunleaded gasoline can cause metallicknocking noises in the engine andwill result in decreased engineperformance. The long-term use ofregular-grade gasoline can lead toengine damage.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

272

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７７　

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If your notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle at the outside of thedriver’s seat.

1.

2.

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

273

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：５０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７８　

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display (see rightcolumn on this page), and themalfunction indicator lamp mayalso come on (see page ).

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message appears on the multi-information display after you startthe engine.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

4.

5.

6.

3.

382

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

274

０７／０６／０１　１９：０６：５８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２７９　

Service Station Procedures

▲ ▼

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. When you can restart theengine, the message appears again.The message goes off after severaldays of normal driving once youtighten or replace the fuel fill cap. Toscroll to another message, press theINFO ( / ) button.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1. 2.

382CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the HoodB

eforeD

riving

275

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

０７／０６／０１　１９：０７：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８０　


Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Hold the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel, and theninsert it all the way back in its hole.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

3.

3.

1.

2.


Oil Check

276

GRIP

CLIPSUPPORT ROD

DIPSTICK

０７／０６／０１　１９：０７：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８１　

Make sure the ‘‘UP’’ mark on theloop is facing up when you insertthe dipstick.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

4.

336

340

333


Adding Engine Oil

AddingEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant Check Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Before

Driving

277

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

‘‘UP’’MARK RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

０７／０６／０１　１９：０７：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８２　

－

－－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

278

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０７／０６／０４　１８：１３：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

333CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Use the required engine oil (seepage ).

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

336

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive EfficientlyB

eforeD

riving

279

０７／０６／０１　１９：０７：４５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８４　

An underinflated tire increases

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

280

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

０７／０６／０１　１９：０７：５４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８５　

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

386

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

Before

Driving

281

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８６　

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Here are some examples:

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Non-Acura wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle

282

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８７　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Cargo area, including the rearseats when folded down.Roof-rack (if equipped)

Console compartmentCenter pocketDoor lining pocketsFront door pocketsGlove box

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

283

GLOVE BOXCARGO AREA

CENTER POCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR LINING POCKETS

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８８　

－ ×

－Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

The maximum load for your vehicleis 870 lbs for U.S. vehicles, and 395kg for Canadian vehicles.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

284

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０７／０６／０４　１６：０６：０７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２８９　

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

(6)

(5)

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

285

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Max Load (870 lbs) Cargo Weight(570 lbs)



０７／０６／０４　１６：０６：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９０　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Do not put any items on top of thecargo area cover. They can blockyour view and be thrown aroundthe vehicle during a crash.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold the rear seats down, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Also, keep all cargobelow the bottom of the windows.If it is higher, it could interferewith the proper operation of theside curtain airbags.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 110 lbs (50 kg).

56

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

286

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９１　

To secure the cargo, you can use thefour cargo hooks on the cargo area.The illustration shows the location ofeach cargo hook.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down light items in the cargoarea. The cargo net may not preventheavy items from being thrownforward in a crash or a sudden stop.Heavy items should be secured tothe cargo area floor with the hooksor cinch straps attached to the cargohooks.

The hanger bars can be used to hangitems. The hanger bar is designed tohang light items (maximum load: 11lbs or 5 kg on each side). Heavyitems may damage the bars.

The cargo hooks on the floor can beused to install the cargo net forsecuring items.

Cargo Hooks/Hanger Bars Optional Cargo Net

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

287

HOOK

HANGERBARS

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９２　

288

０７／０６／０１　１９：０８：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９３　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the super handling-all wheeldrive (SH-AWD) system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 290

........................Preparing to Drive . 291.......................Starting the Engine . 292

..............Automatic Transmission . 293Driving with the Paddle

.......................................Shifters . 297Super Handling-All Wheel Drive

...................(SH-AWD) System . 301...........................................Parking . 303

.............................Braking System . 304...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 305

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 307

Vehicle Stability Assist............................(VSA) System . 312...........................Towing a Trailer . 314

Off-Highway Driving..................................Guidelines . 321

Driving

Driving

289

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９４　

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your vehicle is equipped with asuper handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system. When the systemsenses a loss of one or more wheeltraction, it automatically transferssome power to the other wheels.This gives you better traction andmobility.

You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

321

Driving Guidelines

290

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：１１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９５　

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

You should do these checks andadjustments before you drive yourvehicle:

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , and

).1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.135

119

14

14461 71

77

Preparing to Drive

Driving

291

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９６　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Your vehicle has an electric vacuumpump located in the enginecompartment. When you drive incold weather or thinner air at highaltitude, the electric vacuum pumpoperates more frequently after theengine is started.

When the electric vacuum pump is inoperation, it makes some mechanicalnoises come from the enginecompartment. This is normal.

1.

2.

3.

4.5.

6.

Starting the Engine

292

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

121

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：３０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９７　

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).78

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

293

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９８　

－－

－If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

296

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.


Shift Lock Release

Park (P) Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

294

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：４４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０２９９　

－

－

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically adjusts to keepthe engine at the best speed for thedriving conditions.

To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. This position is similarto D, except only gears from first tofourth are selected. The S positionkeeps the transmission from cyclingbetween fourth and fifth gears instop-and-go driving.

With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.Once you begin to use the paddleshifters in S, the transmission will nolonger upshift or downshiftautomatically. For more informationof driving with the paddle shifters,see page .

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

297


Drive (D)

S position (S)

Engine Speed LimiterD

riving

295

０７／０６／０１　１９：０９：４９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３００　

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the rear.Return the key to the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


296

COVER

RELEASEBUTTON

NOTCH

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

KEY

０７／０６／０４　１８：１３：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０１　

＋

－

＋－

CONTINUED

Each time you pull the (right), thetransmission shifts to a higher gear.Pull the (left) to downshift. Youwill see the selected gear number onthe instrument panel.

When you pull either paddle shifter,the gear position indicator shows youthe selected gear number.

When you are driving in D position,pulling the either paddle shifterswitches from the ordinaryautomatic transmission [drive mode(D)] to the D-paddle shift mode. Youcan shift the transmission up ordown manually with the paddleshifters.

To shift up or down, use the(right) or (left) paddle shifter oneach side of the steering wheel.

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

Using the Paddle Shifters in Dposition (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

Driving

297

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０２　

The transmission downshifts to firstgear and returns to drive mode (D)when the vehicle comes to acomplete stop and the vehicle speedis about 6 mph (10 km/h).

If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to drive mode(D).

Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onegear up or down. If you want to shiftup or down more than two gears, pullthe paddle shifter twice, pause, andthen pull it again.

The automatic transmission will notallow you to change shift if:

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the upper limit ofthe lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lower limit ofthe higher gear.

You press both paddle shifters atthe same time.

You press one of the two paddleshifters with another paddleshifter being pressed.


298

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０３　

When the transmission returns todrive mode (D), the displayed gearnumber goes out.

The transmission remains in theselected gear if you do not accelerate.

The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as innormal driving, the systemjudges that you are driving at aconstant cruising speed withoutusing the paddle shifters. Underthese conditions, D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission automatically returns todrive mode(D).

＋－

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull eitherpaddle shifter, the gear positionindicator displays on ‘‘M’’ along withthe selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the(left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in first gear,and you must manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5thgear, the transmission downshifts tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

The vehicle slows down to acertain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

With the shift lever in S position, youcan select the sequential shift modeto shift gears; much like a manualtransmission using the paddleshifters, but without a clutch pedal.

To enter the sequential shift mode,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, move the lever tothe S position, then pull either paddleshifter. To cancel the sequential shiftmode and return to the ordinaryautomatic transmission, move theshift lever from S position. Whenmoving the shift lever, be careful notto operate incorrectly. While you aredriving in the sequential shift mode,the transmission will notautomatically return to ordinaryautomatic transmission.

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shift in Sposition (Sequential Shift Mode)


Driving

299

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：２３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０４　

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm. Driving in thehigher gear helps fuel economy.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

To shiftfrom

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 29 mph (47 km/h)




Here are the speed ranges forupshifting and downshifting.

To shiftfrom

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

over 8 mph (13 km/h)



The automatic transmission will notallow you to change shift if:

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the upper limit ofthe lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lower limit ofthe higher gear.

You try to shift to third or a highergear when the vehicle is stationary.

You press both paddle shifters atthe same time.

You press one of the two paddleshifters with another paddleshifter being pressed.


300

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０５　

＋

CONTINUED

When you are in sequential shiftmode, and the vehicle is stopped,pull the (right) paddle shifter toshift to second gear. You will see ‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in secondgear helps to reduce wheelspin indeep snow or on a slippery surface.

The super handling-all wheel drive(SH-AWD) system is a full time all-wheel-drive system thatautomatically controls and transfersvarying amounts of engine torque toall wheels independently, accordingto the driving conditions.

While the SH-AWD system helps toenhance the vehicle’s drivingstability in all situations, it is stillyour responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety. The SH-AWD torque distribution

monitor on the multi-informationdisplay shows you the amount oftorque being sent to the wheels.Each wheel: right front (RF), leftfront (LF), right rear (RR), and leftrear (LR), has its own torqueindicator.

SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive(SH-AWD) system

Driving with the Paddle Shifters, Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System

Driving

Starting in Second Gear

301

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：３９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０６　

Your vehicle still has normal front-wheel drive with vehicle stabilityassist (VSA), but does not have theadvantages of SH-AWD. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer as soonas possible.

If the SH-AWD indicator on theinstrument panel stays on, and the‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message also appears on the multi-information display, there is problemwith the SH-AWD system.

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks whiledriving, it indicates the differentialtemperature is too high. You will alsosee an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMPHIGH’’ message on the multi-information display. If this happens,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out. Ifthe indicator does not go out, takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked.

Each torque indicator is displayed asa bar graph divided into 5 segments.The number of segments representsthe amount of torque distributed toeach wheel.

When there is only a slight change intorque distribution while driving,such as cruising on level roads at thesame speed, the torque distributionmonitor may stop displaying theamount of torque. This is not asystem problem. The monitor willshow the amount if the systemsenses any change in torquedistribution.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System

302

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０７　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving

303

０７／０６／０１　１９：１０：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０８　

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist using negative pressuregenerated by the engine and theelectric vacuum pump helps reducethe effort needed on the brake pedal.The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps you retain steering controlwhen braking very hard.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.


When you drive in cold weather orthinner air at high altitude, theelectric vacuum pump operates morefrequently after the engine is started.

For more information about theelectric vacuum pump, see page .

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

384

Braking System

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System Design

304

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：０１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３０９　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

78

383

CONTINUED

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

305

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１０　

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

383

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

306

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator may come on unexpectedly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure.

When the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator is on, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.You should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire informationplacard.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.

If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and message on themulti-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

370

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Driving

307

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１２　

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when alltire pressures are normal.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tire may become overinflated.However, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on ifthe tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,this indicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

360

310

361

Tire Pressure Monitor


308

INFO BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：３２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１３　

CONTINUED

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.

If any of the tires has low pressure,the tire pressure monitor also showsabove message to warn you aboutthe low tire pressure when you selectthe display by pressing the INFObutton several times. Following thisdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton to see each tire pressure.When you continue driving afterinstalling the spare tire, you will alsosee this message on the multi-information display.


Driving

309

This shows that front left tire islosing pressure.

Canada

U.S.

SEL/RESET BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１４　

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’message and the tire pressurereadings are not displayed. If thishappens, you will first see a systemwarning message ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,the VSA system automatically turnson even when the VSA system isturned off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch (see page ). If thishappens, you cannot turn the VSAsystem off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message will also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after several miles(kilometers) driving.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator begins to flash (see page

).69

313


TPMS System Failure

310

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１５　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS and tire monitorindicators will come on. Replace theindicated flat tire with the compactspare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on whiledriving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays on again.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

This indicator and the warningmessage on the multi-informationdisplay will go off, after several miles(kilometers) driving, when the sparetire is replaced with the specified

regular tire equipped with the tirepressure monitor sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

370


Changing a Tire with TPMSD

riving

311

０７／０６／０１　１９：１１：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１６　

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on (see page ),or the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message with the indicator flashing(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off withthe VSA OFF switch. In this case,you cannot turn the VSA system offby pressing the VSA OFF switchagain.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

67

307

310

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

312

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１７　

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

364

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

313

VSA OFF SWITCH

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１８　

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10 % of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

321

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

314

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３１９　

－

－

－To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 % of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40 % toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load is 4,894 lbs(2,220 kg).

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load must not exceed2,546 lbs (1,155 kg) on the front axle,and 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rearaxle.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 6,394 lbs (2,900kg)

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province, andlocal regulations.

If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.

CONTINUED

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving

315

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２０　

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state/province,and local regulations. Check withyour local trailer sales or rentalagencies for the requirements in thearea where you plan to tow, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Acura requires that any trailer with atotal trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Trailer LightsTrailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

316

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２１　

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located under the rightside tool case in the cargo area.Refer to the drawing above for thewiring color code and purpose ofeach pin.

Additional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Driving

317

GROUND(BLACK)

HAZARDLIGHT(ORANGE)

LEFT TURNSIGNAL(YELLOW)

RIGHT TURNSIGNAL(BROWN)

BRAKELIGHT(LIGHTGREEN)

TAILLIGHT(RED)

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：４２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２２　

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

You may want to fill the fuel tankwith premium fuel. Premium fuelprovides improved performance.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension,cooling system, and lights are ingood operating condition.

Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

318

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：５０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２３　

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to S

the lower gear (3, 2 or 1)in the S

not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember,it will take longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. See ‘‘

’’ in the next column foradditional gear information. Do notexceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higherspeeds, the trailer may sway oraffect vehicle handling.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge (see page

). If it nears the H (Hot) mark,turn the A/C off, reduce speed and,if necessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

76

CONTINUED

Driving on HillsTowing Speeds and Gears

Driving onHills

Making Turns and Braking

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Driving

319

０７／０６／０１　１９：１２：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２４　

position. When towing a trailer, do

position, or use the paddle shift to

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

bottom

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

320

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：０５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２５　

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

Be sure to store cargo properly,and do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance andsuper handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system allow you tooccasionally travel on unpaved roads,to campgrounds, picnic sites, andsimilar locations. It is not designedfor trailblazing, mountain climbing,or other challenging off-roadactivities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

284 314

General Information Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving

321

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２６　

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in D position will help youhave a smoother start on snow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes


322

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２７　

Avoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure ofthe depth or the ground, turn aroundand find another route.

Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricantand causing an eventual failure. Itcan also wash the grease out of thewheel bearings.

Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,or other surfaces where you couldget stuck. If you do happen to getstuck because of inclement weatheror other conditions, choose a safeand appropriate course of action.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

If you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the SH-AWD system. The SH-AWDindicator on the instrument panel willblink to indicate the rear differentialtemperature is too high.

You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP HIGH’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If this happens, stop and alloweverything to cool down. The SH-AWD indicator goes off after therear differential temperature drops.

78

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream


Driving

323

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２８　

324

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：３３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３２９　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe multi-information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 326....................Maintenance Minder . 327

..............................Fluid Locations . 335........................Adding Engine Oil . 336

.................Required Engine Oil . 336Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 338..............................Engine Coolant . 340

....................Windshield Washers . 342....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 343

....................................Brake Fluid . 345....................Power Steering Fluid . 346

.............................................Lights . 347................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 354

.....................................Floor Mats . 354..............................Audio Antenna . 355

.....................................Intercooler . 355..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 355

.................................Wiper Blades . 356...........................................Wheels . 359

...............................................Tires . 360...................Checking the Battery . 366

.............................Vehicle Storage . 368

413

Maintenance

Maintenance

325

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３０　

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

326

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you to beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures andprecautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３１　

－－－－－－－－－－－－▲ ▼

One of the most convenient andimportant features of the multi-information display on your vehicleis the maintenance minder.

Based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life.

The system also displays the codefor other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe INFO ( / ) button on thesteering wheel repeatedly, until theengine oil life is displayed (see page

).73

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

CONTINUED

Engine Oil Life

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

327

INFOBUTTONS

ENGINE OILLIFE DISPLAY

SEL/RESET BUTTON

０７／０６／０１　１９：１３：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３２　

－

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance schedule codeindicating the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change.Refer to page for a complete listof the maintenance main items andsub items.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘5%’’, and themaintenance item code are displayedon the lower part of the multi-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 1 5percent (see page ).

When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ message with the samemaintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed with. Whenyou see this message have theindicated maintenance performed assoon as possible. 327

334

Maintenance Minder

328

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３３　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

－

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0%, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code(s).This message is displayed when thetotal mileage is less than 10 miles(for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0%.

These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe oil life minder as previouslydescribed.

The message will be canceled if theor button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or buttonto see the message again.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘0 %’’, andthe maintenance item code aredisplayed on the lower part of themulti-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 0 1 %.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

329

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：０９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３４　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0%, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total mileage after the remainingoil life became 0%, and themaintenance item code(s).

This message is displayed when youdrive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)or 10 km (for Canadian models)after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

The message will be canceled if theor button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or buttonto see the message again.

When you press the SEL/RESETbutton to select the engine oil life,the message ‘‘SERVICE’’, along withthe maintenance item code and thetotal negative mileage after the oillife became 0 %, will be displayed onthe lower part of the multi-information display.

Maintenance Minder

330

MAINTENANCE CODE

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：１６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３５　

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel until you seethe engine oil life display.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

All the maintenance items displayedin the multi-information display arein code.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .

1.

2.

3.

334

CONTINUED

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

331

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３６　

▲ ▼Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then pressthe SEL/RESET button to resetthe engine oil life display. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want tocancel the oil life reset mode,select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all receiptsas proof of completion, and have theperson who does the work fill outyour Maintenance Journal orCanadian Maintenance Log. Checkyour warranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Acura partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

4.

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance Minder

332

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３７　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed in accordancewith the intervals indicated by theMulti-Information Display.

276

343

277

345

361

347

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

333

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３８　

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

334

:

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission and transfer fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission and transfer temperatures. Thisrequires transmission and transfer fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by themaintenance minder. If you regularly drive yourvehicle under these conditions, have the transmissionand transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolantReplace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher level ofmechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

56

1

1

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replacethe brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

333

Main

tenance

Min

der

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３３９　

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

335

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４０　

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Your vehicle is equipped with a high-performance turbocharged enginethat requires the use of syntheticmotor oil. Always use Mobil 15W-30 or an equivalent oil that meetsthe Acura HTO-06 standard. Not allsynthetic oils will meet this standard.Only use oils that display theHTO-06 standard on the label.

Failure to use Mobil 1 or anequivalent oil that meets the HTO-06standard can lead to a reduction inengine performance or durability,and can cause engine damage notcovered by your warranty.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Required Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

336

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０７／０６／０１　１９：１４：５８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４１　

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-30 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

337

Ambient Temperature

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：０２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４２　

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to the filterbase. A stuck gasket could causean oil leak.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

338

WASHER

OILFILTER

OIL DRAINBOLT

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４３　

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

339

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

5.0 US qt (4.7 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４４　

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

340

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：２３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４５　

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spills immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

2.

1. 4.

5.

6.

3.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

341

RESERVE TANKRADIATOR CAP

MAX

MIN

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：３３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４６　

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

To check thewindshield washer fluid level, openthe hood and look the windshieldwasher reservoir located behind theleft headlight. You will see a ‘‘1/2’’mark on the reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

On U.S. models:

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

342

Front

WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

Fill up to here

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４７　

CONTINUED

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

1.

2.

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission FluidM

aintenance

343

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：４７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４８　

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, thenadd the fluid into the fill hole tobring it to the level between theupper and lower marks on thedipstick.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

so you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

5.

6.

3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

344

FILL PLUG

HOTMARK LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１５：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３４９　

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

345

MAX

MIN

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：０３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５０　

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Power Steering Fluid

346

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５１　

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified technician.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Open the hood.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Headlight Aiming

Low Beam Headlight BulbReplacement

Replacing a High Beam HeadlightBulb

Lights

Maintenance

347

BULB CONNECTOR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５２　

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

348

BULB

SOCKET

SOCKET BULB

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：３０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５３　

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the light assemblycover. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsmiddle edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

Install the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Tailgate)

Maintenance

349

COVER

NOTCH SOCKETS

BULBS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５４　

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: brake/taillight, turn signal or rear sidemarker.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Open the tailgate.

Remove the two bolt covers on therear pillar by prying on the bottomedge with a flat-tip screwdriver.Remove the bolts with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and remove thelight assembly from the rear pillar.


Reinstall the light assembly cover.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

2.

4.

5.

3.1.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Rear Pillar)

350

COVERS

BULB SOCKET

BOLTS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５５　

CONTINUED

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw and use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove theholding clip located under thefront bumper.

Push up the undercover.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.


Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts. Snap the bolt covers intoposition.

1.

2.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light BulbM

aintenance

351

HOLDING CLIP

SCREW

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on theglass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１６：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５６　

Remove the two screw covers onthe light assembly by prying onthe side edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Remove the screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver, then removethe light assembly from thetailgate.

Install the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Put the undercover in place.Reinstall the clip, and tighten thescrew securely.Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

352

COVERS

SCREWS

CONNECTORBULB

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：０５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５７　

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Reinstall the high-mount brakelight assembly into the tailgate.Tighten the two screws andreinstall the covers.


Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

6.

5.

7.

3.

4.

Lights

Side Turn Signal Light

Replacing a Rear License PlateLight Bulb

Maintenance

353

SOCKET

BULB

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５８　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

A non-Acura floor mat may not fityour vehicle properly. This couldprevent the proper operation of thefolding rear seats and the passenger’sseat weight sensors. We recommendusing genuine Acura floor mats. Donot put additional floor mats on topof the anchored mat.

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

354

LOOP

FLOOR MAT ANCHORS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３５９　

Your vehicle is equipped with aintercooler on the engine to cool theair flow from a turbo charger intothe engine. The intercooler fins bendeasily. Do not push them with yourfinger.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on the multi-information display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe climate control system becomesless than usual.

Audio Antenna, Intercooler, Dust and Pollen Filter

Audio Antenna Intercooler

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

355

ANTENNA

INTERCOOLER

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna at the rear of the roof . Bef oreusing a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,remove the antenna by unscrewing it byhand. This prevents the antenna f rombeing damaged by the car wash brushes.

Do not spray water (f rom such sourcesas garden hoses, high pressuresprayers) into the engine compartment.It may cause serious damage to yourvehicle, and could also damage theintercooler f ins.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６０　

To replace a front wiper blade: Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

356

WIPER ARMS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６１　

←←

←

CONTINUED

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Install the new blade onto theblade assembly:

Find two tabs with a ‘‘SET’’ and‘‘ ’’ mark on the wiper bladeassembly. This is the direction youinstall.

Slide the blade onto the assemblyuntil it is locked by the tabs.

Remove the blade from the bladeassembly:

Pull out the blade by grabbingthe end of the blade as shownabove illustration.

Find two tabs with a ‘‘SET’’ and‘‘ ’’ mark on the wiper bladeassembly. The opposite side ofthe ‘‘ ’’ mark is the directionyou pull out the wiper blade.

5.3. 4.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

357

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

BLADE

TABS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：４５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６２　

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

To replace the rear wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

Slide the blade out of the wiperarm.

6.

7.

1.

2.

8.

Wiper Blades

358

BLADEWIPER ARM

０７／０６／０１　１９：１７：５３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６３　

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new blade into the wiperarm. Make sure it is engaged inthe slot along its full length.

Lower the wiper arm.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

5.

3. 4.

Wiper Blades, Wheels

WheelsM

aintenance

359

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６４　

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

307

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

360

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６５　

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .398

CONTINUED

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront/Rear:

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures Tire InspectionM

aintenance

361

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P235/55R18 99V

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６６　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

400

Tires

Tire MaintenanceTire Service Life

TireLabeling

362

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６７　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe illustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Tires

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and WheelsM

aintenance

363

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６８　

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

398

400

Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications

Snow Tires

Tires

364

18 x 7 1/2J

P235/55R18 99V

(TPMS)Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３６９　

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Acura stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Cable type: Shur Grip ZSZ343

Tires

Tire ChainsM

aintenance

365

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：５２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７０　

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

366

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１８：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７１　

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.If your vehicle’s battery is

disconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset bars or presetbuttons (depending on models) toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting will be reset to 1:00. To setthe time again, follow the settingprocedure (see page ).188

232


On RDX models

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

367

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７２　

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Vehicle Storage

368

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７３　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 370....................Changing a Flat Tire . 371

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 375................................Jump Starting . 377

..............If the Engine Overheats . 379.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 381..........Charging System Indicator . 381

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 382....Brake System Indicator (Red) . 383

Brake System Indicator.....................................(Amber) . 384

..............................................Fuses . 385..............................Fuse Locations . 389

......................Emergency Towing . 391

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

369

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７４　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced withthe spare tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator stays on.After several miles (kilometers)driving with the spare, thisindicator begins to flash, thenstays on again. You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).310

Compact Spare Tire

370

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７５　

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchit.

Open the tailgate. Raise the cargoarea floor lid by lifting it up withthe strap, then remove the lid.The spare tire, jack, and tools areunder the cargo area floor.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Unscrew the wing bolt. Use thehooked end of the wheel nutwrench extension as a wrench ifthe wing bolt is hard to loosen.Then take the spare tire out of thecargo area.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

371

JACK

WING BOLT

LID

SPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７６　

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Remove the tools, wing bolt andthe jack. To remove the jack, turnthe jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it.

6.5. 7.


372

JACK

WING BOLT for normal tire

WHEEL NUT WRENCH JACKING POINTTOOLS

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUTS

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：４０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７７　

CONTINUED

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

373

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７８　

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and store it in the cargoarea.

Place the flat tire face up in thecargo area.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Reinstall the cargo area floor, andclose the tailgate.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

311


Changing a Tire with TPMS

374

For normaltire

For sparetire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０７／０６／０１　１９：１９：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３７９　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified mechanic todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

377

391

366

377

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

375

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８０　

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .121

292

386

391

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Won’t Start

376

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８１　

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Turn off all electrical accessories:heater, A/C, climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

377

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：２１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８２　

＋

＋

－

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding pointas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Jump Starting

378

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：２８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８３　

CONTINUED

If the temperature gauge readingstays at the H (Hot) mark, turn offthe engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge on the multi-information display should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the H(Hot) mark, you should determinethe reason (hot day, driving up asteep hill, etc.).

If the coolant temperature rises to224°F (118°C) or more, thetemperature gauge will appear onthe display and blink for severaltimes. At the same time, the beeperwill sound once.

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to the H (Hot) mark.Or you may see steam or spraycoming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

379

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the H (Hot) mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８４　

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the H mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

9.

8.7.

6.

5.

10.

11.

391

391

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

380

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：４５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８５　

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

You will also see an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

4.

3.77

276

336

391

77

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

381

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２０：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８６　

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

The indicator may also come on withthe ‘‘D’’ indicator.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It takes atleast three days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).

77

406

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes Emissions Testing

382

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８７　

The brake system indicator (red)normally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and as a reminder to checkthe parking brake. It will stay on ifyou do not fully release the parkingbrake.

If the brake system indicator (red)comes on while driving, the brakefluid level is probably low. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUIDLOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

345

77

77

391

Brake System Indicator

Brake System Indicator (Red)

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

383

CanadaU. S.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：１２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８８　

Your vehicle has an electric vacuumpump located in the enginecompartment. It enhances theeffectiveness of your vehicle’s brakesystem more frequently when youdrive in cold weather or thinner air athigh altitude after the engine isstarted.


The brake system indicator (amber)on the instrument panel normallycomes on for a few seconds whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it stays on afterthe engine starts, press on the brakepedal with your foot several timesuntil the indicator turns off. If theindicator is still on or comes on againafter this procedure, there is aproblem in the brake systemincluding the electric vacuum pump.If this happens, the brake pedalmight feel heavy when you press it.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).77

Brake System Indicator

Brake System Indicator (Amber)

384

CanadaU. S.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：１７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３８９　

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary under-hood fuse box isin the engine compartment on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.The interior fuse box is on the

driver’s lower left side.

The secondary under-hood fuse boxis next to the battery. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

385

INTERIOR

FUSELABEL

TAB

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY) UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

TAB

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９０　

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Remove thescrews with a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

3.1.

2. (Under-hood fuse boxes)

389 390

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

386

FUSE BLOWN BLOWN

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９１　

CONTINUED

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.Look for a blown wire inside the

fuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower. The spare fusesare provided back of the under-hood fuse cover.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

4. 5.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

387

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：３８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９２　

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the audio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the audio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ on the display.Use the preset bars or buttons(depending on models) to enter thefive-digit code (see page ).

When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock (see page ).

If the navigation system fuse isremoved, the navigation system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to theNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

6.

232

188

On RDX model

On RDX with technology Packagemodel

Fuses

388

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：４４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９３　

＋

－

－

－

－

No. No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps. Amps.

Amps.

1234567

89

101112131415

RR WiperOPDSMeterSRSRight Headlight HighLeft Headlight HighSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)

16171819202122232425262728

29303132333435363738

Right Headlight LowLeft Headlight LowHeadlight High MainSmall Lights MainTPMSHeadlight Low MainNot UsedNot UsedMoonroofDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedAccessory Socket (ConsoleCompartment)

B ACCPassenger’s Power WindowRadio AmplifierRight Rear Power WindowLeft Rear Power WindowNot UsedRadioHACDaytime Running LightFR Wiper

SH-AWDFuel PumpACGABS/VSAHeated SeatFR Fog LightsDriver’s Power Seat LumbarSupport

7.5 A20 A15 A7.5 A15 A20 A7.5 A

10 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A15 A

15 A15 A20 A20 A

7.5 A30 A

20 A20 A20 A

15 A

15 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A30 A

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

389

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９４　

－

－

No. No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps.

Amps.1

2

3

4

56789

10

11121314151617181920212223

1 Electric Vacuum Pump

Main FuseSH-AWDOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS/VSA Fail SafeABS/VSA MotorHeadlight MainPower Window MainNot UsedMain Fan MotorSub Fan MotorRear DefoggerBlowerHazard

LAFStop & HornPower Seat (Recline)Power Seat (Slide)IGPS Oil LevelNot UsedElectric Vacuum PumpIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

15 A15 A20 A20 A

7.5 A

15 A15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A

100 A30 A80 A50 A20 A40 A50 A40 A

30 A30 A30 A40 A15 A

Fuse Locations

390

Primary Fuse Box

Secondary Fuse Box

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES

PRIMARY

SECONDARY

０７／０６／０１　１９：２１：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９５　

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

391

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of theall-wheel-drive system. Your vehicleshould be transported on a f lat-bedtruck or trailer.

０７／０６／０１　１９：２２：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９６　

392

０７／０６／０１　１９：２２：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９７　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 394................................Specifications . 396

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 398

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 398.................................Treadwear . 398

......................................Traction . 398.............................Temperature . 399

.................................Tire Labeling . 400Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 401

.......................Emissions Controls . 403.....................The Clean Air Act . 403

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 403

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 403

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 403

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 404....................PGM-FI System . 404

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 404

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 404

....................Replacement Parts . 404..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 405

........................Emissions Testing . 406

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

393

０７／０６／０１　１９：２２：１０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９８　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

394

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０７／０６／０１　１９：２２：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０３９９　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

395

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

０７／０６／０１　１９：２２：１８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４００　

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

396

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Seating Capacities

Capacities

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

65.2 in (1,655 mm)104.3 in (2,650 mm)61.9 in (1,572 mm)62.6 in (1,590 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

3.39 x 3.90 in (86.0 x 99.0 mm)140.4 cu-in (2,300 cm )

8.8 : 1

180.7 in (4,590 mm)73.6 in (1,870 mm)

SILKR8A-S 4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

2.9 US qt (2.7 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

8.2 US qt (7.8 )3.5 US qt (3.3 )2.22 US gal (8.4 )1.85 US gal (7.0 )

18.0 US gal (68 )

5.0 US qt (4.7 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )6.1 US qt (5.8 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:0.18 US gal (0.7 )

TotalFrontRear

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

523

Fuel tank

Engine oil

EnginecoolantAutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidTransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

with turbo charger, intercooler

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

(NGK)

ChangeTotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

Total2

1

０７／０６／０４　１６：０６：３６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０１　

－－

－

－－

＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

397

Air Conditioning

Battery

Fuses

Alignment

Tires

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)15.8 17.6 oz (450 500 g)

SP-10

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

12 V 60 W12 V 35 W12 V 24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

Capacity12 V12 V

65 AH/20 HR52 AH/5 HR

12 V

12 V

5 W

4 CP8 W16 W3 CP2 CP21 W3 CP21/5 W21 W3 CP55 W12 V

12 V 2 CP

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.0 in (0 mm)0.10 in (2.5 mm)

0°10’1°

2°57’

Size

Pressure

P235/55R18 99VT165/80D17 104M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type.Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed byyour dealer.

Headlights

Front turn signal/parkinglightsFront fog lightsFront side marker lightsRear turn signal lightsBrake/Taillights (in fenders)Taillights (in tailgate)Back-up lightsRear side marker lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightRear ceiling lightFront ceiling lights/SpotlightsDoor courtesy lightsCargo area light

See page 389 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 390 or the fuse boxcovers.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

:

(HB3)(D2S)

HighLow

(Amber)

(H11)

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：０１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０２　

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

398

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：０９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０３　

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TemperatureTechnicalInform

ation

399

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：１３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０４　

－

－－

－

－

－－

－－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).Tire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).Rim diameter in inches.Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

R

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

23555

1899

V

yearweek

P

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)Tire Size

400

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(3)

(1)

(1)

(4)

Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

(1)(2)(3)(4)

(2)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P235/55R18 99V

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：２９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０５　

－

－

－

CONTINUED

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire can hold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry at maximum airpressure.

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

TechnicalInform

ation

401

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０６　

－

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

402

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：４３　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０７　

＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

334

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

403

０７／０６／０１　１９：２３：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０８　

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement PartsPGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

404

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：００　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４０９　

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic converterscontain precious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converters are referredto as three-way catalysts, since theyact on HC, CO, and NOx.Replacement units must be originalAcura parts or their equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

405

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：０６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１０　

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal and let the engine idle for 20seconds.

Drive your vehicle for 30 secondswhile accelerating.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

406

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：１５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１１　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mphfor at least 20 minutes. Drive onthe highway in D. Do not use thecruise control. When traffic allows,drive for 90 seconds withoutmoving the accelerator pedal.(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;this is okay.) If you cannot do thisfor a continuous 90 secondsbecause of traffic conditions, drivefor at least 30 seconds, then repeatit two more times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

8. 9.

10.

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

407

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：２０　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１２　

408

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：２２　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１３　

..........Client Service Information . 410....................Warranty Coverages . 411

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 412

.....................Authorized Manuals . 413

Warranty and Client Relations

Warranty

andC

lientRelations

409

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：２６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１４　

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraClient Services Office.

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

394

Client Service Information

410

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Acura Client Services

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：３４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Acura warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty Coverages

Warranty

andC

lientRelations

411

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：４４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１６　

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

; or write to:

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

412

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：４８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１７　

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washigton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

413

Publication

Form Number

61STK01

61STK01EL

61STK30

31STK610

31STK810

31STKM10

31STKQ10

ACU-R

Form Description

2007-2008 Acura RDX Service Manual

2008 Acura RDX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2007 Model series Acura RDX

Body Repair Manual

2008 Acura RDX Owner’s Manual

2008 Acura RDX Navigation System Manual

2008 Acura RDX Honda Service History

2008 Acura RDX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：５６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１８　

414

０７／０６／０１　１９：２４：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４１９　

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 281ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 122............Accessory Power Sockets . 155

................Active Head Restraints . 135......................................AcuraLink . 237

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 337.......................Additives, Gasoline . 272.............Adjusting the Sound . 186, 217

.....Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 119........Adjust Outside Temperature . 74......Adjust Outside Temp. Display . 89

...........................Advanced Airbags . 27...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 23

..............Air Conditioning System . 160.........................................Usage . 161

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 361......................................Antifreeze . 340

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 64, 305

...................................Operation . 305..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 232

Anti-theft Steering Column............................................Lock . 122

........................................Armrests . 136..............................Audio Antenna . 355

................................Audio System . 168............................Auto Door Lock . 101

.........................Auto Door Unlock . 109.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 115...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

..............Automatic Transmission . 293..........................Capacity, Fluid . 396

...............Checking Fluid Level . 343Driving with the Paddle

...................................Shifters . 297.......................................Shifting . 293

Shift Lever Position...............................Indicators . 293

................Shift Lever Positions . 294....................Shift Lock Release . 296

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 220

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 63, 381............................Jump Starting . 377

..............................Maintenance . 366

............................Specifications . 397..............................Before Driving . 271

....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 19.........................Beverage Holders . 154

.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 252..................................Booster Seats . 53

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 305

.............Break-in, New Linings . 272....................Bulb Replacement . 350

...........................................Fluid . 345.......................................Parking . 148

......System Indicator (Red) . 65, 383System Indicator

...........................(Amber) . 65, 384..........................System Design . 304........................Wear Indicators . 304

.............................Braking System . 304.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 272

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 117

......................Brights, Headlights . 114

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：０４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２０　

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 349

..............................Brake Lights . 350.................................Fog Lights . 351

................Front Parking Lights . 348........Front Side Marker Lights . 348

.................................Headlights . 347.........High-mount Brake Light . 352.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 350

............................Specifications . 397............................Taillights . 349, 350

............Turn Signal Lights . 348, 350......................Bulbs, Halogen . 347, 351

Bulbs, High Voltage Discharged............................................Type . 347

............................Capacities Chart . 396.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

..............................................Cargo . 283.........................Cargo Area Cover . 158..........................Cargo Area Light . 151

.................................Cargo Hooks . 287......................................Cargo Net . 287

.............................Carrying Cargo . 283

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii.........................................CD Care . 223

..........................CD Changer . 173, 196CD Changer Error

...................................Messages . 226................................Ceiling Lights . 149

........................Certification Label . 394.................................Chains, Tires . 365

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 371.................................Changing Oil . 338

........................................How to . 338......................................When to . 327

...Charging System Indicator . 63, 381............Checklist, Before Driving . 291

.....................................Child Safety . 35..............................Booster Seats . 53

.............................Child Seats . 35, 43.....Important Safety Reminders . 39

..........................................Infants . 40............................Large Children . 52

.........................................LATCH . 45......................Risks with Airbags . 36

.............................Small Children . 41.........................................Tethers . 50

...........................Warning Labels . 37.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 36

.................................Child Seats . 35, 43.........................................LATCH . 45

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50................Childproof Door Locks . 124

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 354....................Client Service Office . 410

..............Climate Control Sensors . 167...............Climate Control System . 160

..............................................Clock . 188...................................Coin Holder . 157

........................CO in the Exhaust . 403............Cold Weather, Starting in . 292

......................Compact Spare Tire . 370.................Console Compartment . 156.................Consumer Information . 410

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 340....................................Checking . 277

.........................Proper Solution . 340.............Temperature Gauge . 73, 76

............................Courtesy Lights . 151Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 403................Cruise Control Indicator . 67............Cruise Control Operation . 234

Index

C

II

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：０８　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２１　

＊＊

CONTINUED

....................Cruise Main Indicator . 67...................................Cup Holders . 154

.......................Customized Settings . 80....................................Default All . 83.................................Door Setup . 100

.............................Lighting Setup . 95.................................Meter Setup . 86

..............................Economy, Fuel . 278............................Elapsed Time . 73, 75

...........................Reset Condition . 93........Electric Vacuum Pump . 304, 384

..................................Emergencies . 369.............Battery, Jump Starting . 377

Brake System Indicator......................................(Red) . 383

Brake System Indicator.................................(Amber) . 384

................Changing a Flat Tire . 371.....Charging System Indicator . 381

..................Checking the Fuses . 386.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 118

............................Jump Starting . 377.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 381...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 382

..................Overheated Engine . 379............................Tailgate Open . 126

..................Emergency Towing . 391

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 116.................................Dead Battery . 377

........................................Default All . 83.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 412

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 118

..............Defrosting the Windows . 163....................................Dimensions . 396

.............Dimming the Headlights . 114Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 344..................................Engine Oil . 277

........................Directional Signals . 114........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 304

.......................................Disc Care . 223

........................Disc Changer . 173, 196Disc Changer Error

.....................................Message . 226.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 339

.....................................Door Setup . 100........................Auto Door Lock . 101

.....................Auto Door Unlock . 109.......................Door Lock Mode . 103

Keyless Lock................Acknowledgement . 105

.............Security Relock Timer . 107Doors

............Childproof Door Locks . 124

............Locking and Unlocking . 123....................Power Door Locks . 123

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 398.......................................Drive (D) . 295

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 289

....................................Economy . 278........................Driving Guidelines . 290

............Driving Position Memory . 146.......Driving with Paddle Shifters . 297

................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 297...............................In S Position . 299

..........Dual Temperature Control . 165

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 355

Index

E

D

IND

EX

III

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２２　

...................................Fan, Interior . 162.........................................Features . 159

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 273Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 355...............................................Oil . 338

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 118...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 371

.....................................Floor Mats . 354Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 343..........................................Brake . 345

..........................Power Steering . 346..................Windshield Washer . 342

..............Folding Rear Seat Down . 136........................Four-way Flashers . 118

Front Airbags............................Driver’s Side . 9, 25

.....................Passenger’s Side . 9, 32......................Front Door Pockets . 153

Front Seat.........Adjusting (Driver’s Side) . 131

..Adjusting (Passenger’s Side) . 132.......................................Heaters . 139

.................................................Fuel . 272.....................AVG. Fuel A/B . 73, 75

......................Fill Door and Cap . 273.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...........................................Gauge . 71.............................INST. Fuel . 73, 75

................Octane Requirement . 272...............................Oxygenated . 273

........................Tank, Refueling . 273.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 274

...............................Fuel Economy . 278..............................Fuse Locations . 389

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 386

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 278.........................................Gasoline . 272

.....................AVG. Fuel A/B . 73, 75.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...........................................Gauge . 71.............................INST. Fuel . 73, 75

................Octane Requirement . 272........................Tank, Refueling . 273

................Gas Station Procedures . 273

.........................Emergency Brake . 148....................Emergency Flashers . 118

.......................Emissions Controls . 403........................Emissions Testing . 406

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 340

Coolant Temperature.................................Gauge . 73, 76

.........................If It Won’t Start . 375Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 63, 382.........................Oil Life Display . 327

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 381

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 336...............................Overheating . 379

............................Specifications . 396

............................Speed Limiter . 295.......................................Starting . 292

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 403.......Exhaust Emissions Controls . 404

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 17

Index

F

G

IV

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：１９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２３　

CONTINUED

GaugesEngine Coolant

.....................Temperature . 73, 76...............................................Fuel . 71

.................................Tachometer . 71.....................Turbo Boost Meter . 71

...............................Speedometer . 71............Gearshift Lever Positions . 293

......................................Glove Box . 153Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.....................................(GVWR) . 315

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 347..................................Hanger Bars . 287

......HandsFreeLink , Bluetooth . 252............Hazard Warning Flashers . 118

Headlights........................................Aiming . 347

.........Daytime Running Lights . 116..................High Beam Indicator . 67

High-Intensity Discharge......................................Lamp . 347

.........................Reminder Tone . 114........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 347

.................................Turning on . 114.............Headlight Auto Off Timer . 98

............................Head Restraints . 133.............................Heated Mirrors . 145

.................................Heaters, Seat . 139..........................High Beam Lever . 114

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 247

.......................Hood, Opening the . 275...........................................Horn . 4, 111

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 394Ignition

............................................Keys . 119.........................................Switch . 122

............Timing Control System . 404......................Immobilizer System . 121

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 64, 305.......................A/T Temperature . 63

...................Brake (Amber) . 65, 385.........................Brake (Red) . 65, 383

................Charging System . 63, 381

.............................Cruise Control . 67.................................Cruise Main . 67

.....................................Fog Light . 68...................................High Beam . 67

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64......................................Low Fuel . 66

................Low Oil Pressure . 63, 381.....................................Lights On . 68

Low Tire Pressure/...............................TPMS . 69, 307

..................Maintenance Minder . 70.....Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63

.................Passenger Airbag Off . 32..................Security System . 68, 233

......................................SH-AWD . 68.....................Side Airbag Off . 31, 64

.........................................SRS . 31, 63.........................System Message . 70

.TPMS, Low Tire Pressure . 69, 307Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 67VSA (Vehicle Stability

..............................Assist) . 66, 312....................VSA Activation . 67, 312

Index

IND

EX

HI

V

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：２４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２４　

Keyless Lock....................Acknowledgement . 105

...........Keyless Memory Settings . 130................................................Keys . 119

.......................Label, Certification . 394...............Lane Change, Signaling . 114

........................Language Selection . 87

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 20...........LATCH Anchorage System . 45

.................................Lighting Setup . 95Interior Light Dimming

.........................................Time . 96.........Headlight Auto Off Timer . 98

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 347

.......................................Indicator . 62.......................................Parking . 114

................................Turn Signal . 114....................................Load Limits . 284

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 122......................Lockout Prevention . 124

Locks.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 122

........................Childproof Door . 124.............Console Compartment . 156

............................Fuel Fill Door . 273..................................Glove Box . 153

...............................Power Door . 123......................................Tailgate . 125

........................Low Coolant Level . 277................................Lower Anchors . 45

.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 66...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 381

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS...............................Indicator . 69, 307

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 369.Luggage Hooks (Cargo Hooks) . 287

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 283

...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 287

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 372.......................................Jack, Tire . 372

................................Jump Starting . 377

..................................Maintenance . 325...........Main Items and Sub Items . 331

............................................Minder . 327

..................Individual Map Lights . 150...............................Infant Restraint . 40

......................................Infant Seats . 40..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 360........Recommended Pressures . 361

....................................INFO Button . 72.................................Inside Mirror . 144

.............................Inspection, Tire . 361....................Installing a Child Seat . 44

............................Instrument Panel . 61......Instrument Panel Brightness . 117

..............Instruments and Controls . 59.....................................Intercooler . 355

.................................Interface Dial . 189...............................Interior Lights . 149

.......Interior Light Dimming Time . 96........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

M

VI

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：３１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２５　

.......................Minder Indicator . 73, 75Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 333..........................................Safety . 326

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 382...............................Meters, Gauges . 71

.....................................Meter Setup . 86..Adjust Outside Temp. Display . 89

.......Elap. Time Reset Condition . 93....................Language Selection . 87

Trip A&Avg. Fuel Reset with.......................................Refuel . 91

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 144...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 282

.......................................Moonroof . 142.............Multi-Information Display . 72

...................Neutral Gear Position . 294..................New Vehicle Break-in . 272

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 300...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 394

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 272.........................................Odometer . 71

....................Off-Highway Driving . 321Oil

........................Change, How to . 338......................Change, When to . 327......................Checking Engine . 276..............Pressure Indicator . 63, 381

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 336

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 122Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 403......................Optional Cargo Net . 287

............................Outside Mirrors . 144...............Outside Temperature . 73, 74....................Overheating, Engine . 379

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 333

............Panel Brightness Control . 117........................Park Gear Position . 294

...........................................Parking . 303

...............................Parking Brake . 148Parking Brake and Brake

......System Indicator (Red) . 65, 383...............................Parking Lights . 114

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 303

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 32.............................PGM-FI System . 404

Playing the XM Satellite..........................................Radio . 228

...................................Pollen Filter . 355........................Power Door Locks . 123

...............................Power Sockets . 155....................Power Steering Fluid . 346

............................Power Windows . 140.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 17

........................Preparing to Drive . 291.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

CONTINUED

Index

IND

EX

N

O

P

VII

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：３７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２６　

＊

＊

........................Protecting Children . 35.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.......Protecting Larger Children . 52.........Protecting Small Children . 41

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 50

.............................Using LATCH . 45

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 19

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 412.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57..............................Safety Messages . iii

.............Satellite Radio, XM . 183, 211.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 19

...............Additional Information . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

.....................................Cleaning . 354................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 20

................................Maintenance . 22Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 19, 62...................System Components . 19

...............Use During Pregnancy . 17...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14

..................................Seat Heaters . 139..............Seats, Adjusting the . 131, 132

.................Security Relock Timer . 107............................Security System . 233

.......................SEL/RESET Button . 72...............................Serial Number . 394

...................Radiator Overheating . 379.................Radio Theft Protection . 232

...........................Readiness Codes . 382Rear Pillar Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 350.............Rear Seat, Folding Down . 136

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 270..........................Rear View Mirror . 144

...............Rear Window Defogger . 118Rear Window Wiper and

.......................................Washer . 113Reception, XM Satellite

..........................................Radio . 228.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 131, 132

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 300........................................Refueling . 273

................Remote Audio Controls . 230.....................Remote Transmitter . 127

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 355

................Engine Oil and Filter . 338..........................................Fuses . 386

................................Light Bulbs . 347...........................................Tires . 363

.................Transmitter Battery . 128.............................Wiper Blades . 356

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 22

..........Reporting Safety Defects . 412.....................Required Engine Oil . 336

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 277, 340

...............................Restraint, Child . 35...............Retractable Master Key . 120

..................Reverse Gear Position . 294......................Reverse Mirror Tilt . 145

......................................Roof Rack . 286................................Rotation, Tire . 363

Index

S

R

VIII

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：４１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２７　

CONTINUED

.........Service Station Procedures . 273..........................Setting the Clock . 188

SH-AWD (Super Handling-All.........................Wheel Drive) . 301

.......................................Indicator . 68.........................System Message . 78

Torque Distribution............................Monitor . 76, 301

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 293........................Shift Lock Release . 296

......................................Side Airbags . 9How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

........................Side Curtain Airbags . 9How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30Side Marker Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 348, 350.............................Signaling Turns . 114

.....................................Snow Tires . 364................................Sound System . 168

......................................Spare Tire . 370................................Specifications . 396................................Speed Limiter . 295

..........SRS, Additional Information . 23...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

......................Advanced Airbags . 27.............................Airbag Service . 33

......Airbag System Components . 23.....................Dual-Stage Airbags . 26

............Dual-Threshold Airbags . 27How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30.............................SRS Indicator . 31, 63

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 122.......................Starting the Engine . 292

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 292

................With a Dead Battery . 377........Steam Coming from Engine . 379

Steering Wheel................................Adjustment . 119

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 122

Steering Wheel................Buttons . 72, 230, 234, 253

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 368........................................Sun Visor . 155

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 23......................................Servicing . 33

.........................SRS Indicator . 31, 63...................System Components . 23

..................................Synthetic Oil . 336

Tailgate............................Open Indicator . 11

...............................Opening the . 125............Unlocking the Tailgate . 126..Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 349, 350

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 369

Index

IND

EX

T

IX

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：４６　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 369

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 398........................Unleaded Gasoline . 272

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 339

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 284......................Vehicle Dimensions . 396

....Vehicle Identification Number . 394

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 398.....Emissions Control Systems . 403

....................Emissions Testing . 406Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 405.............................Tire Labeling . 400

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Required

.........Federal Explanation . 401.................Temperature Gauge . 73, 76

..............Temperature, Outside . 73, 74..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50

................Theft Protection, Radio . 232..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 417

.........Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 274................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 119

..........................Time, Setting the . 188....................................Tire Chains . 365

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 371.........................Tire Information . 398

...............................................Tires . 360..............................Air Pressure . 361

........................................Chains . 365.........................Checking Wear . 362

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 398

......................................Inflation . 360..................................Inspection . 361

.....................................Labeling . 400Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

...........................Indicator . 69, 307..............................Maintenance . 362

......................Pressure Monitor . 308..Pressure Monitoring System . 307

...................................Replacing . 363......................................Rotating . 363

................................Service Life . 362...........................................Snow . 364

....................Specifications . 364, 397...................Tools, Tire Changing . 372

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 314

................Emergency Wrecker . 391....Equipment and Accessories . 315

....................Pre-Tow Checklist . 318.............................Weight Limit . 314

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring..................................System) . 307

...............................Indicator . 69, 307Required Federal

............................Explanation . 401.....................Trailer Loading . 314, 315

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 319Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 343

...........................Fluid Selection . 344..............Identification Number . 395.............Shifting the Automatic . 293

.....................................Treadwear . 362

.................................Trip Meter . 73, 74.........................Turbo Boost Meter . 71

..................................Turn Signals . 114

Index

U

V

X

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：５１　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４２９　

＊

＊

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 312.......................Indicators . 66, 67, 312

.............................Vehicle Storage . 368.............................Ventilation . 163, 164

.................................................VIN . 394..................................Viscosity, Oil . 337

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

..................Warranty Coverages . 411Washers, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 342...................................Operation . 112

...........................................Wheels . 359.............Adjusting the Steering . 119............Alignment and Balance . 362

..............................Wrench, Nut . 372Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 141................Operating the Power . 140

.........................Rear, Defogger . 118Windshield

.....................................Cleaning . 112

...................................Defroster . 163.....................................Washers . 342

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 356

...................................Operation . 112....................................Worn Tires . 361

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 391

: U.S. only

Index

IND

EX

W

XI

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：５５　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４３０　

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：５７　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４３１　

０７／０６／０１　１９：２５：５９　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４３２　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Required Engine Oil;

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) (see page

).

Always use Mobil 1 5W-30 or anequivalent oil that meets theAcura HTO-06 standard.

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

18.0 US gal (68 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

5.0 US qt (4.7 )Front/Rear:

Use Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) only.

Capacity:SH-AWD differential case

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

2.8 US qt (2.7 )

343

346

345

０７／０６／０１　１９：２６：１４　３１ＳＴＫ６１０　０４３３　

Documents

Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - Service Express RDX Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is